JP6974289B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, when a game ball fired in a game area wins a prize in a predetermined winning opening, the identification information is variably displayed, and when the display result of the variable display becomes a predetermined display result, a game corresponding to the display result is generated. Pachinko game machines that let you play are known. The predetermined display result is, for example, a display result indicating a big hit or a display result indicating a small hit. Further, the pachinko gaming machine controls the gaming state to one of a plurality of gaming states such as a normal state, a time saving state, and a probabilistic state.

For example, there is known a pachinko gaming machine in which a first special symbol and a second special symbol can be variably displayed at the same time and a small hit is frequently generated in a probable change state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-033787

However, when a small hit game in which the game ball hardly wins is executed, the variable display is not performed during the small hit game, which gives the player the impression that the game is not progressing smoothly. There is a risk. For this reason, the player may feel uncomfortable, and the interest of the game may be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game) and controls a gaming state. Variable display of game state control means (for example, a portion of the game control computer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) for executing steps S120 to S128 shown in FIG. 6) and identification information (for example, a special symbol). (For example, the portion for executing steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) shown in FIG. 4) and the effect executing means for deriving and displaying the display result. (For example, a CPU 120 for effect control), the gaming state control means has an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit game state) and a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game). A state), a non-special state (first KT state), and a special state (for example, a second KT state) that is more easily controlled by the special state than the non-special state, and the advantageous state and the special state can be controlled. Is a state in which the variable display of the identification information is not performed, and the special state and the non-special state are different from the normal state by firing the game medium toward a predetermined path among the movable paths in which the game medium can move. Is also in an advantageous state for the player, and the effect executing means can execute the variable display of the effect identification information according to the variable display of the identification information, and when the variable display of the identification information ends, a predetermined period of time is reached. It is possible to stop and display the effect identification information over a period of time, and when the special state is controlled, the effect identification information that was stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display of the immediately preceding identification information is continuously stopped and displayed. In the special state and the non-special state, it is possible to execute the promotion notification for promoting the launch of the gaming medium toward the predetermined route, and when the promotion notification is executed in the special state, the special state is executed. When controlled to, it is possible to execute a special effect corresponding to the control of the special state (for example, the small hit notification image 020SH202, the small symbol 020SH201, and the winning effect image 020SH203 shown in FIG. 10-9). When the promotion notification is executed in a non-special state and controlled to the special state, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that is different from the special effect and suggests a content advantageous to the player. , Introduced as the above-mentioned suggestion effect After executing the effect, it is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies the expectation degree controlled in the advantageous state with respect to the variable display of the effect identification information, and when the suggestion effect is executed, when it is controlled to the special state. The introduction effect can be executed, and the notification effect can be executed when the variable display of the effect identification information is started after the end of the special state.

According to such a configuration, even if the control of the special state (small hit game) is repeatedly executed in the non-special state (for example, the first KT state), the player is given the impression that the game is proceeding smoothly. That is, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game by controlling the special state in the non-special state. In particular, according to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest when the suggestion effect is controlled to the special state in the non-special state.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1), the effect executing means can perform variable display of decorative identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) in response to variable display of the identification information. When controlled to the special state in the special state, a special display result (for example, a definite symbol "1, 3, 5" which is a combination indicating a small hit game) is displayed as a display result of the decoration identification information, and the non-display result is displayed. When controlled to the special state in the special state, a predetermined display result (combination of decorative symbols indicating loss) different from the special display result is displayed as the display result of the decoration identification information.

According to such a configuration, in the non-special state, even if it is controlled to the special state, it is difficult for the player to be advantageous (because it can hardly be expected that the game ball will win the special winning opening during the small hit game. ), By forcibly stopping and displaying a predetermined display result (for example, a lost symbol), it is possible to prevent the player from being overly expected.

(3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display is a display result indicating that the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state for the variable display that has not been started yet. (For example, a pre-start determination means for pre-reading determination), and the effect executing means includes the suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect based on a pre-reading determination determination result) for suggesting the pre-start determination means. The pending change suggestion effect shown in (E) of -10) can be executed.

According to such a configuration, since it is possible to perform a suggestion effect that makes a suggestion regarding the pre-start determination means, it is possible to increase the expectation for the variable display that has not been started yet. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest when being controlled to a special state in a non-special state.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3), the holding storage means for storing information related to the variable display as the holding storage information is provided, and the effect executing means is stored in the holding storage means. The reserved storage information is displayed as a hold display (for example, the hold display 020SH206 shown in FIG. 11-10 (A)), and in the suggestion effect, an action effect acting on the hold display (for example, FIG. 11-10). The action effect image 020SH213) shown in (E) can be executed, and there are a case where the display mode of the hold display changes and a case where the display mode of the hold display does not change.

According to such a configuration, since it is possible to perform a series of effects including an action effect and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display, it is possible to pay attention to the hold display and raise the expectation for the hold storage information. can. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest when being controlled to a special state in a non-special state.

(5) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) is provided with a setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, and the effect is executed. The means can execute the suggestion effect (for example, the set value suggestion image 020SH220 shown in (E) of FIG. 11-12) that makes a suggestion regarding the setting means.

According to such a configuration, the player can guess the set value when the special state is controlled in the non-special state (for example, the first KT state). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest when being controlled to a special state in a non-special state.

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5), the non-special state includes a first non-special state (for example, a non-probability change state: low probability / first KT state) and the first non-special state. There is a second non-special state (for example, a probabilistic state: high probability / first KT state) that is more easily controlled to the advantageous state than the non-special state, and the effect executing means is controlled to the first non-special state. The common effect (chance time mode) can be executed between the time when the player is in the second non-special state and the time when the second non-special state is controlled, and the suggestion effect is controlled in the second non-special state. (For example, the probability change suggestion image 020SH230 shown in (E) of FIG. 11-13).

According to such a configuration, it is common when controlled to either the first non-special state (for example, high probability / first KT state) and the second non-special state (for example, low probability / first KT state). Since it is possible to execute the effect and suggest that it is controlled to the second non-special state (for example, execute the probability change suggestion effect) when it is controlled to the special state, the first non-special state and the second non-special state can be performed. When the state is controlled to the special state, the player can be made to guess whether or not the player is controlled in the second non-special state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest when being controlled to a special state in a non-special state.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6), the effect executing means has, as the suggestion effect, a plurality of types of suggestion effects having different modes (for example, (B) in FIG. 11-7). The odd number setting suggestion, the even number setting suggestion, and the setting value 4 or more suggestion) can be executed, and the advantage of the content suggested to the player differs depending on which type of the suggestion effect is executed. ..

According to such a configuration, by making it possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestion effects, it is possible to increase the variation of the suggestion effects, so that it is possible to prevent the suggestion effects from becoming monotonous. In addition, since the degree of advantage differs depending on the suggestion effect, the degree of attention of the player can be different depending on the suggestion effect to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest when being controlled to a special state in a non-special state.

(8) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (7), the variable display executing means has a variable display of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and a second identification information (for example, for example). The variable display of the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel, and the first state in which the gaming medium easily passes through the starting area (for example, the second starting winning opening) and the gaming medium pass through the starting area. The difficult second state is provided with a variable first variable winning means (for example, the variable winning ball device 6B shown in FIG. 1), and the gaming state control means is such that the first variable winning means is in the first state. It is possible to control to a predetermined state (for example, the first KT state) that is easily changed, and the effect executing means executes the suggestion effect when controlled to the special state (for example, a small hit game state) in the predetermined state. It is possible.

According to such a configuration, even if the control of the special state is repeatedly executed in the predetermined state (even if the small hit game in the first KT state in which the game ball hardly wins is repeatedly executed), the game proceeds smoothly. It is possible to give the player the impression that he / she is doing, that is, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game by controlling the special state in the predetermined state. In particular, according to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest when the hobby is controlled to a special state in a predetermined state.

(9) In any of the game machines (1) to (8) above, the game ball is in an easy-to-win state (open state) and the game ball is in a difficult-to-win state (closed state). A variable second variable winning means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 17 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and the second variable winning means can be changed to the winning easy state in the special state, and the effect. The execution means executes the suggestion effect in response to the change of the second variable winning means to the winning easy state (for example, the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17).

With such a configuration, it is difficult to pay attention to the opening of the second variable winning means (special variable winning ball device 17), and it is possible to pay attention to the suggestive effect. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the control of the special state in the non-special state (small hit game in which the game ball hardly wins), and the control of the special state reduces the interest of the game. It can be suppressed.

(10) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (9), in the gaming state control means, in the special state, the gaming medium is in a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special variable winning ball device 17: It is possible to control the advantageous state based on passing through the so-called V region).

According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the gaming medium has passed through a specific area, a non-special state (for example, a normal state in which the gaming ball hardly wins during a small hit game). Even if it is controlled to a special state in the above, it is possible to give the player the impression that the game is proceeding smoothly, that is, the player feels uncomfortable with the progress of the game by controlling the special state in the non-special state. You can suppress holding. In particular, it is possible to improve the interest when being controlled to a special state in a non-special state.

(11) In any of the game machines (1) to (10), when the effect executing means is controlled to the special state in the special state, the gaming medium has a special area (for example, a discharge area). Based on the passing (for example, the game ball is detected by the second count switch 24 provided in the special winning opening), a predetermined effect corresponding to the passage of the special area of the game medium (for example, FIGS. 11-11). (C), the winning effect image 020SH203) can be executed, and when the game medium is controlled to the special state in the non-special state, the predetermined effect is achieved regardless of whether or not the gaming medium has passed through the special area. Do not execute.

According to such a configuration, when the player is controlled to the special state in the special state (for example, the second KT state), the player is urged to pass through the special area (for example, to win a prize in the special variable winning opening) by a predetermined effect. , Can improve the interest in special situations. On the other hand, when the game medium is controlled to the special state in the non-special state (for example, the first KT state), the game medium may rarely pass through the special area, but the predetermined effect is not executed. It is possible to prevent the player from expecting the player to pass through the special area when the state is controlled to the special state.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit composition example of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a payout control board. It is a rear view which shows the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. (1) to (3) are explanatory views showing the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect, and (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification example when the setting changing flag is set at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power cut occurs before the set value is confirmed, and (2) shows control when a power cut occurs after the set value is confirmed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the special variable winning ball device in the feature part 052IW. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards, etc. in a feature part 052IW. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the character control normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the gate passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process of opening a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the way of transition of a game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing before opening of a normal electric accessory. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect processing at the time of over winning. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the suggestion effect decision table at the time of over winning. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect processing at the time of a small hit prize. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the suggestion effect decision table at the time of a small hit prize. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display suggestion effect processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the prize ball number display suggestion effect decision table. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number emphasis effect effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the prize ball number emphasis production decision table. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start wait process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the setting value suggestion effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the ending effect processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect mode of the setting value suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating display mode of right-handed notification. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the suggestion effect at the time of an over prize, the suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize, and the suggestion effect at the time of a prize ball number display. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the suggestion effect at the time of an over prize, the suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize, and the suggestion effect at the time of a prize ball number display. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing in modification 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in modification 1. FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when it becomes a small hit in the variation display of the other special symbol during execution of the variation display of one special symbol in modification 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing in modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in modification 2. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when it becomes a small hit in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in the modification 3. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when a small hit is made in the variation display of the other special symbol during execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modification 3. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing in the modification 4. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in the modification 4. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the game state and the transition of an effect mode after a big hit game which concerns on a feature part 020SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect mode setting process which concerns on a feature part 020SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display correspondence display control processing which concerns on a feature part 020SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the initial color determination table and the final color determination table of the variable display correspondence display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion effect execution process performed by the effect control CPU 120 when it is controlled to a small hit game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion effect execution process performed by the effect control CPU 120 when it is controlled to a small hit game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the determination table of various suggestion productions. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the change effect execution process of the variable display correspondence display performed by the effect control CPU 120 during variable display. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the effect screen in a small hit RUSH mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the effect which changes the display mode of the hold display in a chance time mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the Gase effect of the effect which changes the display mode of the hold display in a chance time mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the setting value suggestion effect in a chance time mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the probability change suggestion effect in a chance time mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the small hit opening timing and the execution timing of various suggestion effects.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

Further, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a right-handed display 26 for prompting a right-handed operation of aiming at the right side of the game area and performing a firing operation is provided. There is. The right-handed display 26 is composed of, for example, LEDs, and is controlled to be lit by a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to a variable display in which execution is held is provided. In this example, the first hold display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure and the second hold display for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure. A region 5B is provided. A display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handed notification LED 37 for prompting a right-handed operation is provided. The right-handed notification LED 37 is lighting-controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning opening is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening is guided to the back surface of the game board 2 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Further, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first start winning opening so that the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area does not enter the area provided with the first starting winning opening. Has been done. In this way, by providing the row of nails 19 for preventing the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area from entering, the game ball is launched by aiming at the left side of the game area (so-called left-handed strike). The game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the operation) is performed.

In this example, the case where the game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed due to the provision of the row of nails 19 is shown. Not limited to. For example, since the first start winning opening is provided on the left side of the game area, the game ball may be configured to be able to win the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed, or the first starting winning opening may be won. A game ball may be configured to be able to win a prize in the first start winning opening only when the mouth is provided on the left side of the game area and the row of nails 19 is also provided to perform a left-handed operation.

A passing gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

Below the passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows in the front-rear direction to move the bottom surface. The large winning opening located below the member is changed into an open state (also referred to as an open state) in which the game ball can win a prize and a closed state (also referred to as a closed state) in which the game ball cannot win a prize. The special variable winning ball device 7 moves the bottom member forward in the jackpot game state that occurs when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state where the bottom member is moved forward toward the rear, and the opening control is executed so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning opening for small hits and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning opening are provided. FIG. 1 As shown in, a special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and a variable winning ball device 6B is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. The special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and have a plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows in the front-rear direction. By moving forward and backward, the game ball can be won in the special winning opening and the second starting winning opening located below the bottom member (also called the open state) and the game ball cannot be won in the closed state (closed state). Change to). The special variable winning ball device 17 has a bottom member in a small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state where it is moved forward toward the front, and the opening control is executed so that the special winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front when the symbol is derived and displayed by hitting the normal symbol display 20. The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening, which is the winning area, is executed.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed to have the same structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, the game ball dropped on the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed. If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, the special variable winning ball device 7 moves from the upper left to the lower right and falls on the variable winning ball device 6B below the special variable winning ball device 7.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are formed. The game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B if the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is in the closed state. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other, the special variable winning ball device 7 is placed on the variable winning ball device 6B without winning a prize. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning opening is open, the gaming ball wins the second starting winning opening and the special variable winning ball. The game ball does not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second starting winning opening is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward and the special winning opening is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning opening. Further, if the special winning opening is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and falls toward the out opening as it is.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of restricting pieces that reduce the flow speed of the game ball flowing down on the bottom surface member. There is. In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with a restricting piece, so that the game flows down from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-back component, and the time required for the flow is delayed compared to the case without the regulation piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. However, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are arranged. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 6B is used as the special variable winning ball device. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward 17, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. It can be said that it is.

A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the large winning opening is provided in the large winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is open-controlled and the large winning opening is opened, it will be in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be closed and the large winning opening is closed, the player cannot obtain the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball through the large winning opening. It will be a disadvantage.

A switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the special winning opening is provided in the special winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) through the special winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of winning balls is smaller than that when the game ball wins in the large winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) another prize opening such as the first start winning opening 1 or the second starting winning opening. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is open-controlled and the special winning opening is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is closed and controlled and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot obtain the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball through the special winning opening. It will be a disadvantage.

Further, in the second start winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting a winning game ball in the second starting winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, a passing gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening), a variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening), and a special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) Is provided on the right side of the gaming area, so when a big hit game or a KT state (so-called small hit time) is in progress, the player aims at the right side of the gaming area and launches (so-called right-handed operation). )I do.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. An ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, since the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, the passing gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the passage gate 41 also plays a role as an operating region because the game shifts to the jackpot gaming state based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that serves as both a normal starting region and an operating region.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a frame LED 9 for gaming effects is further provided around the gaming area. ..

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (so-called left-handed operation) aiming at the left side of the gaming area. When the player performs a left-handed operation by rotating the ball striking operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol is displayed. The first special figure game by the device 4A is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (starting prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit". .. Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing". Even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, and may be configured to be a "small hit".

After the display result in the first special figure game becomes "big hit", the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A big hit type is set for "big hit". For example, prepare multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and gaming states (normal state, probability change state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) after the big hit game state. , The jackpot type is set according to these. As the big hit type, a big hit type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a big hit type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a probability variation state, a KT state, or a high base state according to the jackpot type.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), the probabilistic change control is executed in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

In the KT state, KT control is executed, which is more likely to be a small hit than in the normal state. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hit game state, the number of prize balls obtained is smaller than that in the big hit game state, but it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the high base state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shorter than the normal state is executed (time saving state), and it is called "normal figure hit" in the normal figure game. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed by improving the probability of becoming the game more than in the normal state. The high base state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

The probabilistic state, KT state, and high base state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. do. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number cut (number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a probability variation state, a KT state, and a high base state, and the display result in the special figure game is "big hit". The pachinko game machine 1 controls the same as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (when a predetermined return process is not executed after the power is turned on, for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in a state of being reset.

When the jackpot game is completed and the game state is controlled to the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (right-handed operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. A right-handed operation is performed by the player rotating the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal drawing game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal map game (when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per-normal", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit". If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "big hit", the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed).

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a point of the frame LED9. Equal / extinguishing, may be performed by the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are all stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a definite decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a big hit combination. The confirmed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is pseudo-like a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type of the big hit game state having the same aspect as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the current state is in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 has, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) The detection signal (such as a detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and the switch is turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a solenoid 81, a solenoid 82, a signal for turning on the solenoid 83, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or a prize-winning door. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)), and fluctuation patterns used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further controls the sound designation signal (the signal that specifies the sound to be output) in order to output the sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37. It is supplied to the board 13 or an LED signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the LED) is supplied to the LED control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37, drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 based on the LED signal, and is in a mode designated by the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 are turned on / off. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the LED.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, LED lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, LED signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. Consists of including the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the LED control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). Upon receiving the effect control command, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying, for example, that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized in the image display device 5.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a process of protecting the data of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is being changed, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). Along with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined error processing on the main side, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process (step S25A). By executing the first special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, execution and hold management of the first special symbol game are realized (details will be described later). Further, the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process (step S25B). By executing the second special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, execution and hold management of the second special symbol game are realized. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.

Following the first special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process process (step S25C). By executing the accessory control process process for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 realizes control of the big hit game state, the small hit game state, the game state, and the like (details will be described later).

Following the accessory control process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the normal figure hold display 25C is turned on to display the number of normal figure hold.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

Further, although the description is omitted in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal is a process for outputting a test signal so that the control state of the gaming machine can be confirmed outside the gaming machine. Processing is also executed. In the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 also controls to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can identify that it is a period for performing a right-handed operation. Specifically, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 controls to output a right-handed test signal during the big hit game, during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and during the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 does not control to output a right-handed test signal during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In this first special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the first start winning determination process (step S101A).

In the first start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning in the first starting winning opening, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a start prize is generated in the first start prize opening, a random value for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information in the first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. Will be done. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the first hold storage number, transmission for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the first hold storage number, the look-ahead determination, etc. on the effect control board 12. The settings are made. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is controlled by the main board 11 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the first special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted to the board 12.

After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110A to S113A according to the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110A to S113A) of the first special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The first special symbol normal process in step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this first special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reserved information and the like. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" or "big hit" is determined based on the random value for determining the display result. The jackpot type of the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. .. After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal processing ends.

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The first variation pattern setting process in step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “1”. In this first fluctuation pattern setting process, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are set using random values for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the pre-determination result of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the process of deciding which one to use. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The first special symbol variation process in step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “2”. In this first special symbol variation process, the process of setting the first special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol are measured. Processing to be done is included. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the first special symbol fluctuation processing is completed. do.

In this example, since the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) is performed. While the variable display of the special symbol is being displayed, a small hit may occur in the variable display of the second special symbol and the game may be controlled by the small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is before the small hit is released. (Determining whether or not the value corresponds to the processing to the small hit end processing), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the first special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the first special symbol variation processing. Therefore, the value of the first special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop process if the small hit game is not in progress. By performing such control, the variation display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to do. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol is interrupted (timer). It may be configured to suspend the update).

Further, for example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period may be configured to be different depending on the game state. For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted in the normal state, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes long, and the execution period and the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol become longer. If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period by stopping the shaking of the decorative pattern, which gives the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable to make the small hit ending period shorter than the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be set to 0.5 seconds in the normal state, whereas the small hit ending period may be set to 3 seconds in the KT state.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, for example, in the first KT state, it is practically difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the small hit control, and no particular effect is performed. Therefore, the small hit ending period is shorter than in the second KT state. It may be configured to do so. On the other hand, in the second KT state, since the game ball is easy to win in the small hit control and the effect of emphasizing the small hit control is executed, the small hit ending period may be longer than in the first KT state. .. In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, whereas the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Further, regarding the small hit fanfare period as the small hit opening pretreatment period, the length of the period may be different depending on the gaming state, as in the above-mentioned small hit ending period.

The first special symbol stop process in step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “3”. In this first special symbol stop processing, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A, and the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). The process of making settings is included. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the setting process for starting the big hit game is performed. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the process for starting the small hit game is performed. Then, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. .. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop processing ends.

The process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process process described with reference to FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process process will be explained. Further, each random number value extracted in the first start winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in the second hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as hold information.

In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. Therefore, for example, the transition to the second special symbol variation process is performed to change the second special symbol. When the display is in progress, a small hit may occur in the variable display of the first special symbol, and the game may be controlled by a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the first special figure process flag is before the small hit is released. (Determining whether or not the value corresponds to the processing to the small hit end processing), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the second special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the second special symbol variation processing. Therefore, the value of the second special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop process if the small hit game is not in progress. By performing such control, the variation display of the second special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to do. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol is interrupted (timer). It may be configured to suspend the update).

Regarding the small hit control based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the length of the small hit fanfare period and the small hit ending period may be different depending on the game state.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25C shown in FIG. 4 as the accessory control process process. In this accessory control process process, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S120 to S128 according to the value of the accessory control process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S120 to S128) of the accessory control process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The bonus control normal process in step S120 is executed when the value of the bonus control process flag is “0”. In this bonus control normal process, it is monitored whether or not the setting for starting the big hit game is made, and if the setting for starting the big hit game is made, the process for starting the big hit game is performed. , The value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "1".

The gate passage waiting process in step S121 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “1”. In this gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the passing gate 41. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "2".

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S122 is executed when the accessory control process flag is “2”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S123 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “3”. This big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, and the like. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "4" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. , End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The jackpot release post-processing in step S124 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “4”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit execution number, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit execution number, the accessory control process The value of the flag is updated to "5". When the value of the accessory control process flag is updated, the post-processing after opening the jackpot ends.

The jackpot end process of step S125 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “5”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect effect for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control, KT control, and high-base control. When such a setting is made, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S126 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “6”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the special winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "7", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S127 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “7”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening state of the special winning opening and the measured elapsed time. It includes a process to determine whether or not it is. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to "8", and the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S128 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “8”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 7. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 7 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a frame LED 9 and a decorative LED, and a drive of a movable body 32. Control to operate various production devices such as operation is performed. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in, for example, the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illuminated signals) to the LED control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time for the command has elapsed without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the small hit end effect in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the small hit game state. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the jackpot production process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute a game by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

[Explanation of feature 21TM]
Next, the feature unit 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. 9-1. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes a first start port switch 22A, a second start port switch 22B, a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. Various parts are connected, and various effect devices such as speakers 8L, 8R, and frame LED 9 are connected to the effect control board 12, but these are omitted in FIG. 9-1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and as shown in FIG. 9-3, it is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 21TM201, and the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is promoted. Various circuits for control are installed. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to a hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, a segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 21TM029 is provided with various winning information related to winning. It also has a function to display. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be switched by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

The main board 11 incorporates various signals such as a power cutoff signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal in addition to detection signals from, for example, a game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for game ball detection, and is a game control microcomputer. An information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as security signals from the switch circuit 110 to be transmitted to 100 and the terminal board 21TM016 is mounted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 9-1 is enclosed in a substrate case 21TM201 made of a permeable synthetic resin material, and the display monitor 21TM029 is enclosed in the center of the main substrate 11. (For example, 7 segments) are arranged, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 9-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided in the lower center of the back surface of the main board 11. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, the main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) has each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings, hereinafter, "entry area". The number of game balls entering the (also referred to as) is totaled, and various winning information such as the ratio and the winning ratio based on the total is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and these winning information are displayed. This makes it possible to check various winning information such as the ratio of consecutive ratios and the ratio of roles after installation in the amusement park. That is, on the manufacturer side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming ball enters the general winning opening (passing the test) at a predetermined frequency. In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment is being made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the gaming ball has entered the general winning opening at the frequency as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made in the pachinko gaming machine 1 after installation.

In addition, the power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a permeable synthetic resin material, and set values such as the jackpot winning probability (ball ejection rate), which will be described later, are changed in the lower right side of the back surface of the power supply board. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and a power supply switch 21TM055 that function as setting switches for the purpose are provided. By operating the power switch 21TM055 while the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a clerk at the game hall or the like operates the power switch 21TM055 on each board such as the main board 11, the effect control board 12, and the payout control board 21TM037. The operating voltage of is supplied. Further, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and the initialization process (RAM clear) described later is performed. Will be executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, it is easy to perform the power-on operation and the initialization operation.

The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the clerk who has the specified key can operate it. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires a key operation, only the clerk who has the key to operate the lock switch 21TM051 can operate the lock switch 21TM051 among the clerk of the game store. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation by a predetermined key, but the switching operation can be executed and an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation) is executed. It may be a possible switch.

The lock switch 21TM051 can maintain an ON state or an OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even if the force is not applied by the clerk of the game hall or the like. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 has a configuration in which the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the clerk of the game hall must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key, so that the clerk of the game hall or the like leaves the lock switch 21TM051 in the ON state. It can be prevented from being lost.

As shown in FIG. 9-3, at the lower part on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming balls that have won the winning openings and the gaming balls that have entered the out openings are discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a fired game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a frame LED 9, and decoration. It contains LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the LED.

FIG. 9-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21TM037 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and has at least a built-in RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, RAM (not shown), ROM (not shown) containing the payout control program, the I / O port, and the like constitute the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by a payout control CPU 21TM371, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a RAM and a ROM, and an I / O port. Further, the I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

The detection signals from the ball-out switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main board 11 via the I / O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21TM037 has a gaming machine frame opening sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2, and the front surface of the gaming board 2 can be opened and closed. A pachinko / pachislot machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 equipped with a door frame opening sensor that detects the opening of the glass door frame 3a covering the pachinko / pachislot machine frame 3a is connected, and various abnormalities are found based on the detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that the payout control microcomputer is used. The 21TM370 can distinguish between the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

Further, the detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor consisting of a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect that the game ball is clogged, that is, so-called ball biting. .. In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037, the detection signal from the ball out switch 21TM187 indicates the ball out state, or the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is at a low level with respect to the launch board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball launch from the ball launcher. Output a full tank signal. The launch motor signal to the launch motor 21TM094 output by the AND circuit 21TM091 of the launch board 21TM090 is transmitted from the launch board 21TM090 to the launch motor 21TM094. The full tank signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the launch motor 21TM094). The signal, which serves to supply power from the power supply board), is input to the other side of the input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the launch motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the launch motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs the full tank signal, the output of the launch motor signal to the launch motor 21TM094 is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) a signal by serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are connected to each other via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 and 21TM380 between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. In order to confirm, signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted / received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal for confirming the connection (a prize ball request signal in this embodiment) at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When receiving the prize ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100, transmits a signal (reception ACK signal) notifying the fact to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, by superimposing specific data on the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are transmitted and received at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal. It is configured to exchange specific data with and from. For example, when a prize is awarded, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by differently setting a predetermined bit of the prize ball request signal, and the prize is set. The ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes the prize ball payout operation, the data indicating the end of the prize ball is set by making the predetermined bit of the received ACK signal different, and the received ACK signal with the setting is played. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100. In addition, when a predetermined error (error such as ball lending, full tank, out of ball, etc.) occurs, the data indicating the content of the error is set by making the predetermined bit of the received ACK signal different, and the setting is set. The received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out and a ball rental number signal indicating the number of balls to be rented to a terminal board (external terminal board for frame and external terminal board for board) via the output port 21TM372b. (Including) 21TM160 is output. A driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, but the description is omitted in FIG. 9-2.

Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 by the 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Further, a signal for instructing lighting / extinguishing is output to the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the ball-out LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. A detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for canceling the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

Further, the drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, but the description is omitted in FIG. 9-3.

A microcomputer for controlling the card unit is mounted on the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connecting stand direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp, and a card insertion slot. The frequency display LED 21TM060, the ball lending LED 21TM061, the ball lending switch 21TM062, and the return switch 21TM063 are connected to the interface board (relay board) 21TM066.

From the interface board 21TM066 to the card unit 21TM050, a ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are given to the card unit 21TM050. .. Further, the card unit 21TM050 to the interface board 21TM066 are provided with a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lending permission display signal. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal), and a pachinko machine operation signal ( The PRDY signal) is transmitted and received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-2, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted / received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066.

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. Further, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connected / unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 based on the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated, and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises an XS signal for the card unit 21TM050, and when it detects a fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, it drives the payout motor 21TM289 and gives a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. Pay out. Then, when the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 shuts down the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. After that, on condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, the prize ball payout control is executed when the payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100.

The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in the AC24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. Is prevented.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is.

9-4 (A) to 9-4 (F) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value as a big hit is set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. If it is, the jackpot will be won with a lower probability (1/300) than when the set values are "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". ing. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in a certain case. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than when it is "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (D), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than when the numbers are "2" and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than in the case of "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/235) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to any of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to 9-4 (F). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the winning of the big hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to 9-4 (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of becoming a big hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design.

Further, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F) to determine whether or not to make a big hit, but the big hit determination table is used. It is provided separately, and the big hit is determined by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. May be good.

In this embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The set value that can be set in may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Setting suggestion production)
The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value. 9-5 (1), (2), and (3) show an example of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 9-5 (1) shows an example in which the ending image in the "sunny" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen, and FIG. 9-5 (2) shows an example in which the ending screen in the "cloudy" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. For example, FIG. 9-5 (3) shows an example in which the ending image of the "rain" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. Further, FIG. 9-5 (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the setting value specified by the setting command.

The CPU 103 transmits a setting command for specifying a set value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the jackpot game state ends, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing an ending effect on the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120. By storing the set value specified by the received setting command in the RAM 102, the effect control CPU 120 can determine the mode of the ending effect based on the stored set value. For example, based on the effect control command transmitted when the big hit game state ends, it is stored in the image display device 5 together with a character (character of "BONUS end") notifying that the big hit game state has ended. It is possible to display the ending image of the mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rain mode) determined based on the set value.

In the table shown in FIG. 9-5 (4), when the setting value specified by the setting command is "1, 2", "3, 4", and "5, 6". , When the mode of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be the "sunny" mode shown in FIG. 9-5 (1), the mode is determined to be the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. 9-5 (2), and FIG. 9-. When the "rain" mode shown in 5 (3) is determined, the determination value of is assigned.

When the setting value specified by the received setting command is "1" or "2", the effect control CPU 120 suggests setting the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). Decided to execute the effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a medium ratio (for example, 40%), and medium. (For example, 40%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3). Further, when the set value specified by the received setting command is "3" or "4", the effect control CPU 120 has a "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%). (For example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3). Further, when the set value specified by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the effect control CPU 120 has a high ratio (for example, 50%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%). (For example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3).

In this way, by making the determination ratio of each mode of the setting suggestion effect different according to the setting value, the player becomes interested in how the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the setting suggestion is performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the production. In this example, the player becomes interested in how the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends is executed, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the "sunny" mode. You will expect it to be done.

(Processing when power is turned on)
Next, the power-on processing will be described.
9-6 to 9-8 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed by the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 9-6, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM4010). This process performs a parity check as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a normal value, for example, 0 to 5. Is confirmed (step S21TM4020). In this example, as the setting values stored in the setting value storage area, six numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are set as regular values, and six levels of setting values having different jackpot probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, and the setting in this example. The value 2 corresponds to the set value 3 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, the set value 3 in this example corresponds to the set value 4 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, and the set value 4 in this example is described above. It corresponds to the set value 5 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like, and the set value 5 in this example corresponds to the set value 6 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above.

Here, in this example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped from the gaming machine maker (before it is installed in the game hall), the value having the lowest jackpot probability among the above regular values is stored in the set value storage area. It is assumed that (0 in this example) is stored. If the data in the setting value storage area is corrupted, it may not be a regular value. If the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), it is confirmed whether or not the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting changing flag is set when the mode shifts to the setting change mode described later (step S21TM4580), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM4720).

If the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not it is decided to execute RAM clear (initialization of the gaming state), and if the value is 1, it is determined that RAM clear is executed. It shows that it was done. In this example, the RAM clear is not actually executed when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the processing related to the setting change mode is completed. Will be done.

The area where the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power is cut off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not retained, and the value of the RAM clear flag at the time of power restoration is 0 (the initial value is not set). Note that the notification that the game state is initialized may be performed before being controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and as will be described later, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. It may be done.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4060.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening. A detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected are output from the sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected. When it recognizes that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, the game control microcomputer 100 is notified that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

The game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a, which is a detection signal indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected, for the game control microcomputer 100. When the configuration is such that a detection signal indicating that is output (that is, when the game control microcomputer 100 includes the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the game control microcomputer 100 has these. By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it is confirmed whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). .. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the process proceeds to the process after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 9-7. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the set value can be confirmed and changed, and when the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode, the set value can be confirmed.

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), and the power is not cut off during the setting change (YES). Change the set value and / on the condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060) and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070). Or it can be confirmed. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of a setting command) described later without being controlled by the mode.

In the present embodiment, in order to set the state (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting value can be confirmed although the setting value is not permitted to be changed, (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2). ) Two conditions are required that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. When it is confirmed by the determination process of step S21TM4060 and step S21TM4070 that all of the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, the CPU 103 is in a state where the set value can be confirmed (setting confirmation). It is possible to shift to mode). Further, in addition to these conditions (1) and (2), the RAM clear flag is set based on the determination that (3) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES). As will be described later, it is possible to shift to a state (setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed, provided that the setting value is changed.

As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the gaming board 2, and must be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state. I can't. Even though the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is operated means that there is an abnormality in the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, or something is wrong. There is a possibility that the set value is being confirmed or changed by means. Since it is inappropriate to allow confirmation or change of the set value in such a state, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode. And it is not controlled by any of the setting change modes.

In the present embodiment, as the condition of (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although it is controllable, it is not limited to such a form, and even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode It may not be controlled by any of the above.

On the other hand, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4060 (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. When the closed state is set, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of a setting command) described later without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, when it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), the lock switch 21TM4760 is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is described later in step S21TM4760. Move to (Send setting command).

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4120. Further, in the check of the value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4020), if the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 , Step S21TM4120. If it is confirmed that the setting changing flag is set in the check of the setting changing flag (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4120.

Here, even if a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is damaged, it is determined as NO in step S21TM4010. Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. That is, if there is a possibility that the value stored in the setting value storage area is inappropriate, the setting is changed based on the fact that the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. It will be controlled by the mode. Further, even if the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010) in the data check of the backup RAM area (YES in step S21TM4010), the normal value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area. (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the condition that the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. Further, when the setting change mode is controlled when the power is cut off last time, the setting change mode is controlled based on the condition of the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. It will be.

In step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4120), it is confirmed whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130). ..

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processes after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-7 are executed.

On the other hand, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. In the closed state, the lock switch 21TM051 is not in the ON state in step S21TM4130 (NO in step S21TM4130), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state in step S21TM4140. (NO in step S21TM4140) indicates that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal without the CPU 103 executing the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode. The indicated setting value abnormality error command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value abnormality error command, the image display device 5 notifies that the set value may be abnormal. For example, the message "The setting value may be abnormal" is displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 shifts the image display device 5 to the setting change mode when the power is turned off (the power switch 21TM055 is turned off) and then turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on). The notification prompts the user to perform an operation for changing the set value (determine the set value). For example, the message "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode" is displayed. It should be noted that the same notification may be performed by the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined loop process (repetition of steps S21TM420 to S21TM4220) until the power is turned off.

In this loop processing, after the CPU 103 has performed a weight of 4 ms (step S21TM4200), the character "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, so that "the set value is not a normal value (0 to 5)". Despite the possibility, the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode (that all are determined to be YES in steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140) is not satisfied and the transition to the setting change mode has not been performed. " Notify (step S21TM4210). Then, the security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21TM4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information on a plurality of gaming machines, a card unit or a ring lamp device provided corresponding to the gaming machine, etc.). Will be done.

During the loop processing period, the character "E" is displayed every 4 ms on the 7-segment display provided in the display monitor 21TM029. By providing a weight of 4 ms, it is possible to prevent excessive heat from staying in the 7-segment display and damaging the display. Further, the security signal is continuously output during the loop processing period. By outputting the security signal to the outside, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a normal value (0 to 5)) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the input of the security signal in an external device such as a hall computer. ), But the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied and the transition to the setting change mode has not occurred) can be identified.

The loop processing of steps S21TM420 to S21TM4220 will be continued until the power supply is stopped (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), when the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), and when the power is cut off during the setting change (NO). That is, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on and YES is determined in step S21TM4030), the game should not be played in this state. Before shifting to the normal game processing (for example, the game control timer interrupt processing including the prize ball processing, the special symbol process processing, etc.), it is necessary to fix the set value of the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to shift to the setting change mode.

In the present embodiment, in order to make the set value changeable (setting change mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. (3) Three conditions are required that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. The CPU 103 is in a state where the set value can be changed when it is confirmed by the determination process of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140 that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied. It is possible to shift to the setting change mode).

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the setting value cannot be changed, so that the setting value in the setting value storage area can be fixed to a regular value. It is not possible to shift to normal game processing. Therefore, if NO is determined in any of the determination processes of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140, the process proceeds to the above-mentioned loop process (step S21TM420 to step S21TM4220).

If the process shifts to the loop process (step S21TM420 to step S21TM4220), the normal game process cannot be performed. It doesn't become. In this way, if the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied, the power should be turned off once and all the conditions (1) to (3) should be satisfied when the next power is turned on. Then, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the setting value of the setting value storage area is fixed to a regular value.

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 predetermines the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also possible to urge the power to be turned off by emitting light in the power off instruction mode.

In the present embodiment, when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the setting value is not allowed to be changed, but the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode). , (1) The gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070).

However, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. Even when the two conditions of (YES in step S21TM4130) are satisfied, the setting confirmation mode is not controlled. Even when these conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, if it is determined in step S21TM4140 that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO), It is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM420 to step S21TM4220) without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Next, the processes related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-7 and 9-8. In the process of FIG. 9-7, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a normal value (any of 0 to 5 in this example) ( Step S21TM4510). If a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area (YES in step S21TM4510), the process proceeds to step S21TM4530. When the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 has the lowest jackpot probability as a regular value in the set value storage area, "0". Is stored (step S21TM4520). Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4530.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a power cutoff process after performing a weight of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) (step S21TM4540). In the power cutoff process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a power cutoff signal based on a power cutoff including an unexpected power failure is input, and if a power cutoff signal is input, the power supply is supplied. Immediately before the operation becomes inoperable due to the stop, the power supply stop processing is executed. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a process of protecting the data of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. That is, in the power cutoff process, the check data is stored in a predetermined backup area.

As a result, when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (when the iterative processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620 or the iterative processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 is being performed), the power supply is supplied. If a disconnection occurs, the data check will be properly executed in step S21TM4010 after the power is restored.

Next, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display the value corresponding to the set value (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4550). Here, the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area. Since the clerk of the game hall usually recognizes that the range of the set value is 1 to 6, if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed as it is on the display monitor 21TM029, the clerk of the game hall actually displays it. There is a risk of erroneously recognizing the set value of. Therefore, in this example, [value stored in the set value storage area + 1] is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as a set value. Next, the CPU 103 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is not executed after the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode) is completed, the CPU 103 specifies that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled. The setting confirmation mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4650), and the process proceeds to step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is executed after the mode (here, the setting change mode) is completed, the CPU 103 changes the set value. Set the setting changing flag indicating that there is a possibility (step S21TM4580). Since the area in which the value of the setting changing flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting changing flag is retained even when the power is turned off. Therefore, if the power is cut off while the setting change mode is controlled, the value of the setting changing flag is 1 (set state) when the power is turned on next time.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command specifying that the setting change mode has been controlled (step S21TM4590). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the CPU 103 inputs the setting changeover switch information indicating whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and confirms whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4680. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and changes to step S21TM4680. Transition. The updated setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

Each time the clerk of the game hall operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the set value stored in the set value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the regular setting value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area when controlled to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on or when the power is cut off last time) is 3. If so, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated in the order of 3 → 4 → 5 → 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 for each setting change operation, and the display monitor 21TM029 responds accordingly. The displayed information will be updated in the order of 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4.

Here, the display of the current setting value (step S21TM4550), the output of the security signal (step S21TM4560), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650) can be executed, but the setting change mode command can be transmitted (step S21TM4590). ) And the state in which the update of the set value (step S21TM4620) cannot be executed corresponds to the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed or the set value cannot be changed. During the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode, the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 are repeatedly executed.

In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES is determined in step S21TM4070), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO is determined in step S21TM4040 and the RAM clear flag). Is still 0).

In addition, it is possible to display the current set value (step S21TM4550) and output a security signal (step S21TM4560), and to send a setting change mode command (step S21TM4590) and update the set value (step S21TM4620). The state corresponds to the setting change mode in which the setting value can be confirmed and changed.

In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (determined as YES in step S21TM4070 or step S21TM4130), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140). It is determined and controlled based on (the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150).

The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, the CPU 103 should set the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag, which can identify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted when the setting confirmation mode command is transmitted, and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. , When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once when the setting change mode is controlled. Therefore, when the setting change mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 can specify that the setting change mode command is transmitted, and sets the setting change mode command transmission flag which does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. , When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

The CPU 103 confirms in step S21TM4680 whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), the weight of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) is performed again, and then the processing after step S21TM4540 is repeated. That is, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the control of the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the control of the setting change mode is continued.

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state in step S21TM4680 (YES in step S21TM4680), the CPU 103 terminates the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and sets 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM4710). By setting a predetermined time as the value of the security signal timer, the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from the predetermined time in the information output processing when the normal game processing is subsequently performed. Will be done. For example, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped when the value reaches 0 ms. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode has ended or the setting confirmation mode has ended.

That is, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), the output of the security signal is started corresponding to the start of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode and the setting confirmation are started. Corresponding to the end of any control of the mode, the value of the security signal timer is set so that the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Set (step S21TM4710).

Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 determines whether it is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled). It is being executed as a common process (without). Further, in step S21TM4710, the process of setting the remaining output period of the security signal is also determined regardless of whether it is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled). It is being executed as a common process. In this way, by standardizing the output start control and output end control of the security signal between the case of being controlled in the setting change mode and the case of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, the output control of the security signal is simplified. , The control burden can be reduced.

In addition, the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is output in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By stopping, it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that the gaming machine may have been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Here, in step S21TM4710 immediately after the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, a common value (1000 ms) is set as a security signal between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled. It is set in the timer. However, if both the output start control and the output end control of the security signal are shared between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting change mode is controlled, which mode is used on the external device side. It becomes difficult to grasp whether it is controlled.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), when the setting change mode is controlled, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the security signal is once in step S21TM4710. After setting 1000 ms as the timer value, reset (overwrite) 30000 ms as the security signal timer value in step S21TM1465 after clearing the RAM based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770 described later. There is. That is, after the remaining output period of the security signal is once set to 1 sec, the remaining output period of the security signal is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

When the signal output control shown above is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), and when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting confirmation mode ends. It is the timing when 1 sec has elapsed from, and when it is controlled to the setting change mode, it is the timing when 30 sec has elapsed from the end of the setting change mode.

Specifically, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled (RAM is not cleared and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the timer for game control after the interruption is permitted is interrupted. In the process (for example, information output process), the output of the security signal is continued until the value of the security signal timer changes from 1000 ms to 0 ms, and the setting change mode is controlled (RAM clear is performed). When the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1 second to 30 seconds), the value of the security signal timer is changed from 30,000 ms to 0 ms in the game control timer interrupt process (for example, information output process) after the interrupt is permitted. The output of the security signal will be continued until becomes. When the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the security signal timer value is set for a predetermined time (1000 ms or 30000 ms) at the timing before shifting to the game control timer interrupt process when the setting change mode is controlled. ) To 0 ms, the output of the security signal may be continued, and after the output of the security signal is completed, the process may shift to the game control timer interrupt process.

In this way, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 sec depending on whether the control of the setting confirmation mode is completed or the control of the setting change mode is completed, and the control is controlled to the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until 30 sec elapses after the control of the setting change mode is completed. With such a configuration, while standardizing the output control of the security signal, the output period of the security signal can be different depending on whether the mode is controlled in the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode.

As a result, it is also possible to grasp whether the external device is controlled to the setting confirmation mode without executing the initialization process, or whether the initialization process is executed and controlled to the setting change mode. .. For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it can be specified that the setting confirmation mode is controlled without executing the initialization process, and if the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, it is the initial period. It is possible to presume that there is a possibility that the conversion process has been executed and the setting change mode has been controlled.

A security signal is also output when a game stop target error such as a magnetic abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the power of the gaming machine is turned off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in the backup area (however, the area cleared by the initialization process) of the RAM 102 based on the fact that the abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, it is assumed that the security signal is output for 4 minutes based on the fact that the abnormality detection flag is set when the power is restored.

Here, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled at the time of power restoration, the RAM clear is not executed, so that the value of the abnormality detection flag is not initialized in the signal output processing and remains set. It is possible to continuously output the security signal for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible not to limit the output period of the security signal to the period from the end of the control of the setting confirmation mode to the elapse of one second. On the other hand, if the setting change mode is controlled when the power is restored, RAM clear will be executed, so the abnormality detection flag will be cleared in the subsequent signal output processing (power cutoff occurs). It is sometimes unknown whether or not an abnormality has been detected), and as a result, the output period of the security signal is the period from the end of the setting change mode until 30 seconds have passed (depending on the execution of RAM clear). Period).

In the example shown in step S21TM4710 of FIG. 9-7, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer. The value of the security signal timer set to is at least a period during which the external device can recognize that the security signal has been output, and may be, for example, 50 ms or more. That is, a common 50 ms may be set as the value of the security signal timer when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

After the process of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag (step S21TM4720). Here, if the power is cut off after that because the setting changing flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not set when the power is restored (NO in step S21TM4030). Become.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the set value (any of 0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area is set in the setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM4760). Even if neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 will be executed and the setting command will be transmitted.

Here, the player usually recognizes that the range of the set value is 1 to 6, and the value specified by the setting command (value stored in the set value storage area) as it is on the effect control CPU 120 side is an image. If it is displayed on the display device 5, the player may misunderstand the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 side recognizes the value obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) specified by the setting command as the set value (1 to 6), and sets the set values 1 to 6. In the range, the effect that suggests the set value is executed.

Not limited to such a form, the CPU 103 sets a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the set value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area in the setting command to control the effect. It may be transmitted to the CPU 120 for use. As a result, the range of the set value specified by the setting command becomes 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. On the effect control CPU 120 side, the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is displayed as it is on the image display device 5, or an effect suggesting the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is executed. By doing so, the set value can be appropriately notified or suggested. Further, it is not necessary for the effect control CPU 120 side to perform addition processing on the set value specified by the received setting command, and the control load on the effect control CPU 120 side can be reduced.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. In addition, it is possible to suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

Here, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770), the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), and the set value is a normal value (step). It is determined that S21TM4020 is YES), the power is not cut off during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040). ) Therefore, it is sufficient to execute the process at the time of power failure recovery without clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes a process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal when the power is turned on, and after the interrupt is permitted, the game control timer interrupt process (special). (Including design process processing, etc.) That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the control of the setting confirmation mode is completed, the CPU 103 performs RAM based on the value of the RAM clear flag being 0. Without executing clear, a backup command will be sent as a command when the power is turned off and restored, and the normal game processing will be started.

In the effect control CPU 120, the recovery from the power failure was performed based on the data at the time of power supply stop based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of recovery) (RAM clear is not performed). That) is recognized. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8L, 8R, and the frame LED 9 is restored from the power failure based on the data when the power supply is stopped. It is possible to notify (RAM clearing has not been performed).

On the other hand, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770) means that the RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it is determined to execute the RAM clear. Therefore, it is sufficient to execute the process at the time of turning on the power accompanied by clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes a process of setting 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer and a process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal when the power is turned on. After the interrupt is permitted, the process may be shifted to the game control timer interrupt process (including the special symbol process process).

As shown in FIG. 9-8, the CPU 103 performs the RAM clear process based on the RAM clear flag of 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear processing, the data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, hold storage, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the initial value is obtained. However, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear process. In addition, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated value for each set value is not cleared. The value does not change before the RAM clear process. Then, by displaying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029 or the like, it is notified that the game state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). By the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for normal symbol hit determination) is initialized to 0, but is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. It may be initialized to. Further, the entire area of the RAM 102 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is.

The reason why the set value stored in the set value storage area is not cleared in this RAM clear process is as follows: (a) If the setting change mode is not controlled, a regular value is stored in the set value storage area when the power is turned on. It means that it has been stored (YES in step S21TM4020), and (b) if it is controlled to the setting change mode, is the value of the setting value storage area set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or is in the setting change mode? This is because the regular value is stored by the operation (step S21TM4610 and step S21TM4620). Further, after the RAM clear processing, the setting change mode cannot be controlled, and there is no opportunity to change the value stored in the setting value storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the initialization table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization setting table in the work area (step S21TM1440). By the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. can be used as flags for selectively processing according to the control state. The initial value is set.

After executing steps S21TM1430 and S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the game control timer interrupt processing described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process processing is executed based on the set value read out here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command specifying that the initialization process has been performed at the time of turning on the power (or at the end of the setting change mode) (step S21TM1460). In the effect control CPU 120, the initialization process is performed based on the reception of this initialization command (the RAM is cleared without the recovery from the power failure based on the data at the time when the power supply is stopped). Recognize what was done). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, for example, in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8L, 8R, and the frame LED 9, the game state and the like are initialized (data when the power supply is stopped). It is possible to notify that the RAM has been cleared without recovering from the power failure based on the above.

Next, the CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, the value (1 second) of the security signal timer set in step S21TM4710 after the setting change mode ends is changed (overwritten) to the value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of RAM clear. become. Further, when the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, step S21TM4710 is not executed (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). The value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the RAM clear being executed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is not executed (including the case where it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode), the process of this step S21TM1465 is not executed, so that the value of the security signal timer is 1 second set in step S21TM4710. There is up to.

Since the value of the security signal timer is set in this step S21TM1465 or the above-mentioned step S21TM4710, the security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (information output process). After that, every time the game control timer interrupt process is executed by the interrupt permission, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped at the timing when the value of the security signal timer becomes 0. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 executes the setting process of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037. Further, the communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to be executable.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). For example, the CPU 103 sets the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result by executing the process according to the random number circuit setting program.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) intervals. That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every 2 ms.

Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S21TM1520) and the initial value random number update process (step S21TM1530). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt prohibition state is set (step S21TM1510), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enable state is set. Set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the process shifts to the normal game processing in which the game control timer interrupt processing can be executed. In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when it is not a big hit, and is for display. The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number for display. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number determines the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol (ordinary symbol hit determination random number generation counter). It is a random number to do. A game control process for controlling the progress of a game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls a game device such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, and a ball payout device provided in the game machine by itself. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal for control by another microcomputer, also called the game device control process), the count value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number is one round (normal symbol hit judgment random number is taken). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value.

In this example, when the RAM clear flag is determined to be 0 (YES) in step S21TM4770, the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the process at the time of power failure recovery, but not limited to such a form, the RAM clear flag is set in step S21TM4770. If it is determined to be 0 (YES), the condition is that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (depending on the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a). You may move to the process when the power is cut off and restored.

Further, in this example, when the CPU 103 determines in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the process at the time of turning on the power (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)). Not limited to this, when it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state (game machine frame). 3 or depending on the state of the glass door frame 3a), the process at the time of turning on the power (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)) may be performed.

As shown above, the clerk of the amusement park puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 into the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. It is possible to control it, and it is also possible to initialize the game state and the like (execute RAM clear). Further, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming state, etc. Is not initialized (NO is determined in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 and the RAM clear flag is not set to 1). In this way, the clerk of the game hall can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also can select whether to initialize the game state or the like. There is.

As mentioned above, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting change mode was controlled when the power was turned off, so the setting value is in an unstable state. There is a possibility that the set value to be confirmed on the playground side is not stored in the set value storage area. In the example shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 is in a game stopped state (step) without shifting to the normal game processing based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 (loop processing) can be controlled, and a security signal is output in response to control to the game stop state (step S21TM4220).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from being started (the game control timer interrupt process is executed) in a state where the set value is unstable, and when the power is turned on, the power is supplied. It is possible to notify the external device that the setting change mode was controlled when the disconnection occurred.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 has a condition for shifting to the setting change mode based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). If step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 are all YES) is not satisfied, a set value error error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190), and a display monitor is displayed in the game stop state (step S21TM420 to step S21TM4220 loop processing). An error display for displaying the character "E" on 21TM029 is performed (step S21TM4210).

In the example shown in FIG. 9-10, by displaying the letter "E" on each of the 7-segment displays 21TM029A to 21TM029D constituting the display monitor 21TM029, an abnormality occurs in the clerk of the amusement park (in the setting change mode). (There is a possibility that the power was cut off while it was being controlled) is clearly notified. Further, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting value abnormality error command displays the message "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode" on the image display device 5, thereby displaying the game hall. Operation to change the setting value by shifting to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on) after the power is turned off (power switch 21TM055 is turned off). (Confirm the set value).

In this example, (a) when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is set. It is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140). If YES) is determined, the setting change mode is controlled. As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is not executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). Please move to the setting change mode. ") Will not be performed either.

Here, in the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the image display device 5 has controlled the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 operation). ) Can be notified that the set value can be changed. For example, the message "In the setting change mode" or the message "Please change the setting value by performing the setting change operation" can be displayed on the image display device 5. As a result, the pachinko / pachislot clerk can grasp that the setting change mode is controlled, and by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area By switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state after changing to the planned set value, the set value can be confirmed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal gaming process.

On the other hand, (b) when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, among the above (i) to (iii). If any of the conditions is not satisfied, the game is stopped (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 loop processing) after the setting value error error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190) without being controlled by the setting change mode. .. As a result, an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and a message display on the effect control board 12 side ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). Please move to the setting change mode. ") Will also be performed.

In this way, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). If this is also performed, the condition for shifting to the setting change mode after the power is restored is the condition of the gaming machine, even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. It will be notified that the state is not established. In this case, the clerk of the game hall, etc. understands that the game is not controlled in the setting change mode and is in the game stop state (it is necessary to turn on the power again to control the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after the power is turned off once, the power is turned on again by operating so that all the conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. Then, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to the planned setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. By switching to the state, the set value can be fixed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be transferred to the normal gaming process.

In this way, when the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

Here, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied when the power is restored (a), an error display (step S21TM4210: display of "E" in the display monitor 21TM029) is performed on the main board 11 side. It will automatically shift to the setting change mode without being disturbed, and it is possible to avoid unnecessary error display and prompt the user to change the setting value appropriately.

On the other hand, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is restored (b), the mode cannot be switched to the setting change mode when the power is restored even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. Since it is in the state, it is forcibly controlled to the game stop state (step S21TM420 to step S21TM4220 loop processing), and the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" in the display monitor 21TM029) is displayed. It will be done. As a result, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in an unstable state in which the set value is not fixed, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

When the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are all satisfied, and the transition condition (i). )-(Iii) may not be satisfied, and different commands may be sent as commands indicating that the set value may be abnormal.

For example, if the transition condition is satisfied, it is a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal, and the mode has been changed to the setting change mode (or the condition for transition is satisfied). On the effect control CPU 120 that received this command, the message "The setting value may be abnormal" and the message "It is automatically controlled to the setting change mode" are displayed as images. It is preferable to display it on the device 5. On the other hand, if the transition condition is not satisfied, the setting value error error command in step S21TM4190 may be transmitted as described above.

After the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends and the normal game processing is started, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated when both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. A lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120 in response to the change (from the OFF state to the ON state), and (2) the setting changeover switch (clear switch). ) 21TM052 is operated (from the OFF state to the ON state), and the setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120.

The effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) is controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command. Despite the fact that there is no such operation, it is possible to identify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed and notify the fact. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "lock switch operation has been detected." In addition, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." Is executed. As a result, the clerk of the amusement park clearly understands that the operation for changing the set value has been performed even though it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is illegal. It is possible to confirm whether or not is performed.

Not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated and the normal game processing is started. The lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. In this way, during the period when the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not confirmed. This makes it possible to reduce the control load of the game control microcomputer 100.

(Modified example of power-on processing)
In the example shown in FIG. 9-6, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120). ), (Ii) The lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140). Only when it was confirmed that the RAM clear flag was set to 1 (step S21TM4150), the mode was changed to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570).

Not limited to such a form, as shown in FIG. 9-11, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), the three conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied. The RAM clear flag may be set to 1 (step S21TM4150) and the mode may be shifted to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570) without confirming whether or not the setting is satisfied.

In the process shown in FIG. 9-11, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010) and the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting changing flag is set. If this is the case (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without determining whether the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied, and the setting is changed. The portion controlled by the mode (NO in step S21TM4570) and not controlled in the game stopped state (process corresponding to the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) is different from the processing shown in FIG. 9-6. The other parts are the same as the processes shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8.

Even in such a form, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 and the setting is changed to the setting change mode based on the setting changing flag being set when the power is turned on. It is possible to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power is cut off during the change.

In the example shown in FIGS. 9-11, when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. It is controlled to the setting change mode based on the three conditions that the state is in the state and the (iii) clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (determined as NO in step S21TM4570). (The setting value of the setting value storage area can be changed), whereas when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii) Regardless of whether or not the three conditions are satisfied, the setting change mode is forcibly controlled.

In this way, if the power is cut off while the setting change mode is being controlled, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set when the power is restored. By automatically controlling the setting change mode regardless of whether or not is satisfied, the workability for fixing the set value can be improved.

Here, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting is made even if the condition (ii) that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130) is not satisfied. It will be controlled to the change mode. As a result, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 while the lock switch 21TM051 remains OFF. (Step S21TM461-10 in FIG. 9-7).

As described above, the condition for terminating the setting change mode is to switch the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state (determine YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state, the clerk at the amusement park who has performed the operation to change the set value temporarily turns the lock switch 21TM051 from the OFF state in order to confirm the set value and end the setting change mode. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (YES is determined in step S21TM4680).

In this way, the condition for starting the control of the setting change mode depending on whether the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) or the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). By making the conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode different (the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state), the conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode are clarified. We are trying to properly shift to normal game processing.

Here, even if the lock switch 21TM051 is urged to be turned on when the setting change mode is controlled based on the setting changing flag being set (YES in step S21TM4030). good. For example, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and sends a setting value error error command (to step S21TM4190 described above). The effect control CPU 120 that received the set value error error command (step S21TM4110) says, "Turn on the lock switch once, and then switch it off after changing the set value." The message may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In the processes shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8 and 9-11, it is not possible to shift to the normal game process when the setting changing flag is set. Therefore, when the pachinko machine maker ships the pachinko machine 1 (before installation in the game hall), the setting changing flag is set in advance, and then the game field side goes through the setting change mode. Unless the set value is changed and the setting change mode is terminated, the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be played. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game hall, it is possible to reliably control the setting change mode to perform the setting change operation and take measures to determine the set value.

(Set value storage control when the power is cut off while changing the set value)
Next, the set value storage control when a power failure occurs while changing the set value will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-12. In the example shown in FIG. 9-7, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode.

First, regarding the control when the setting value is changed during the setting change mode and the power is cut off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the end of the setting change mode), FIG. This will be described using -12 (1).

As shown in order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. In this example, when the power is turned on, "0" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. Next, as shown in order 2, the setting value "0" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out with the start of the setting change mode, and the read setting value is set to 1. "1" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in order 3, the set value stored in the set value storage area is "0" based on the operation of the first setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode. Is changed to "1", and "2", which is obtained by adding 1 to the changed set value, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON. Further, as shown in order 4, the set value stored in the set value storage area is "1" based on the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode. Is changed to "2", and "3", which is obtained by adding 1 to the changed setting value, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in order 5, it is assumed that the power supply is cut off while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state in the setting change mode, that is, before the operation for ending the setting change mode is performed. At this time, the set value "2" after the operation of the second setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is performed is stored in the set value storage area. In the power off state, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. At the time of turning on the power, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This set value "2" is a value stored in the set value storage area when the power is turned off during the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 7, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out with the start of the setting change mode, and the read setting value is set to 1. "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Since the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on in order 6, when the control shown in FIG. 9-11 described above is applied, even if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (or cleared). Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), it will be automatically controlled to the setting change mode. Therefore, the state of the lock switch 21TM051 in the order 6 and the order 7 may be an OFF state.

In this way, when the set value is changed in the setting change mode and the power is cut off without turning off the lock switch 21TM051 (without ending the setting change mode), the power is restored at the time of power restoration. , The set value after the change in the previous setting change mode is held in the set value storage area. Therefore, when the power is restored, the set value that has already been planned may have been set. In this case, the clerk at the pachinko / pachislot hall may end the setting change mode without performing an operation to change the set value again. Since the gaming machine may be shifted to the normal gaming process, workability can be improved.

Next, regarding the control when the power is cut off after the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode ends) by the operation of changing the set value during the setting change mode. This will be described with reference to FIG. 9-12 (2).

The order 1 to order 4 are the same as the example shown in FIG. 9-12 (1), and the description thereof will be omitted. Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, so that the setting change mode ends. As a result, the set value "2" after the operation of the second setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is performed is fixed as the final set value. At this time, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area, and "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 by adding 1 to the fixed set value.

After that, as shown in the order 6, it is assumed that the operation of turning off the power switch 21TM055 is performed and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

Next, as shown in order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. At the time of turning on the power, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This setting value "2" is a value finally stored in the setting value storage area at the end of the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 8, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out with the start of the setting change mode, and the read setting value is set to 1. "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

As shown in FIGS. 9-12 (1) and 9-12, when the power supply is cut off while the setting change mode is controlled, and when the power supply is stopped after the setting change mode control is completed. In either case, when the power is restored, the set value after being changed according to the setting change operation in the previous setting change mode, that is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area immediately before the power is turned off, is , It is a valid setting value (setting value stored in the setting storage area when the power is restored).

It is not limited to the storage control of the set value shown in FIG. 9-12. That is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area when controlled in the setting change mode is copied to the setting information temporary storage area, and the setting changeover switch (clear switch) is used when the setting change mode is controlled. When 21TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area, and the operation to end the setting change mode (lock switch 21TM051 is turned on). Based on the operation of switching from the state to the OFF state), the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored (overwritten) in the setting value storage area and the setting value is confirmed. May be. In this case, the setting value to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and is a setting information temporary storage area. As the set value stored in is changed, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 also changes.

With such a configuration, it is controlled to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, and even when the setting change operation is performed (when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed), the setting is made. If the power is cut off without completing the operation to end the change mode (without switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state), the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is the power supply. It means that it has not been changed since it was turned on (before the setting change operation was performed in the setting change mode). That is, in the power supply stop state, the set value stored in the set value storage area at the time of the previous power-on is still held. Therefore, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on last time. It will be a value according to the set value that was set.

In this way, it is possible to appropriately set the setting value when the power is cut off while the setting change mode is controlled. Further, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode is not terminated, the change of the setting value can be restricted.

The control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiment is provided with a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5), and the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting values. Although it is applicable, it is not limited to this, and although a plurality of set values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is common regardless of the set value (for example, for all of the set values 0 to 5). It can also be applied to gaming machines (with a jackpot probability of 1/300).

Further, the present feature section 21TM discloses the following inventions.

As shown in JP-A-2010-20092 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), there has been proposed a gaming machine that outputs a "big hit signal" or the like from an external output terminal of a main control board. For gaming machines as described in JP-A-2010-20092 (paragraph 0007), when it is necessary for the external device to grasp the control state related to the setting when changing the setting value or the like. However, even if the signal output technique of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp this. be. The invention according to the means O1 to the means O4 is made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately notifying the outside of the gaming machine of a control state related to the setting.

The gaming machine of the means O1 is a gaming machine (pachinko) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different). It is a game machine 1), and the setting value can be confirmed with the setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) that can control the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed. A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650) that can be controlled in a setting confirmation mode, and control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. A specific signal output means that outputs a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start (a game control microcomputer 100 that outputs a security signal in step S21TM4560) and a value related to a period during which the specific signal is output (security signal timer). A setting means (a game control microcomputer 100 for setting a value of a security signal timer) for setting a value) is provided, and the setting means is controlled in a case where the setting change mode is controlled and a setting confirmation mode. It is possible to set a predetermined value that is common to both cases (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710), and the specific signal output means is either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. In response to the end of control, a specific signal is output until at least the period corresponding to the predetermined value has elapsed (with the end of the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is continued until one second elapses from the end of the setting confirmation mode. The security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have elapsed from the end of the setting change mode with the end of the setting change mode). According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the setting can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The gaming machine of the means O2 is the gaming machine of the means O1, and the RAM is cleared based on the initialization means for initializing the gaming state (step S21TM4050, step S21TM4150 in which the RAM clear flag is set (step S21TM1410). The game control microcomputer 100) is provided, and the initialization means initializes the game state according to the control of the setting change mode (when controlled to the setting change mode, it is controlled to the setting change mode). After RAM clear is executed), the setting means sets the predetermined value (after setting 1 second as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710), and then the period corresponding to the predetermined value is longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. A specific value corresponding to a long period can be set (when RAM clear is executed, 30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465), and the specific signal output means changes the setting. Corresponding to the end of mode control, a specific signal is output until the period corresponding to the specific value elapses (with the end of the setting change mode, the security signal is continued until 30 seconds have passed from the end of the setting change mode. And output). According to this, a specific signal is output at least for a period corresponding to a predetermined value in both cases when the control of the setting change mode is completed and the control of the setting confirmation mode is completed, and the setting is changed. When controlled to the mode, a specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value, so the output is different between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode while standardizing the setting processing by the setting means. It is possible to set the period.

The gaming machine of the means O3 is a gaming machine of the means O1 or the means O2, and in the setting change mode, a specific operation for terminating the setting change mode (the lock switch 21TM051 was turned off in step S21TM4680). When the power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing detection), the specific information storage means (setting change mode) for storing specific information (setting changing flag) has been entered (in the backup area of RAM 102, the setting change mode has been entered. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) that sets the setting changing flag in step S21TM4580 and clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 based on the end of the setting change mode, and supplies power to the game machine. When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (when it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set), the game is stopped. It is also possible to output a specific signal (the processing of steps S21TM420 to S21TM4220 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off based on the fact that the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied). And. According to this, when the power supply is stopped during the control of the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the external device when the power supply is restarted.

The game machine of the means O4 is any of the game machines selected from the means O1 to the means O3, and is a game control means for controlling the progress of the game (a game control microcomputer that executes a game control timer interrupt process). The game control means includes a display means (display monitor 21TM029) and a setting change mode control means (steps S21TM4530 to step), comprising 100) and an effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the effect. The game control microcomputer 100 that executes the process of S21TM4620) and the operation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680 without performing a specific operation for terminating the setting change mode in the setting change mode. Is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode in the backup area of the RAM 102, which stores specific information when the power supply to the game machine is stopped. A game control microcomputer 100) that sets the changing flag and clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 based on the end of the setting change mode, and power supply to the game machine is started. In this case, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (when it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set), the display means notifies the error. It is possible to send an error command to the effect control means (a set value abnormality error command is sent in step S21TM4190, and the character "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the error display of step S21TM4210. The effect control means issues a notification prompting an operation for changing the set value in response to receiving the error command (the image display device 5 is "returned to the power supply after the power is turned off". It is characterized by displaying the message "Please turn it on and move to the setting change mode." According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the clerk of the gaming hall, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside. In a gaming machine as described in JP-A-2010-20092 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. The inventions relating to the means P1 to the means P4 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. To provide.

The gaming machine of the means P1 is a gaming machine (pachinko) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different). In the game machine 1), the setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed, and the setting change mode. Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can be specified to be controlled (the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the step is based on the end of the setting change mode. The game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in S21TM4720), and the specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (the specific information is stored). The value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102), and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (power recovery). When it is determined in step S21TM4030 of the time that the setting changing flag is set), an error notification means capable of executing error notification (when the transition condition to the setting change mode is not satisfied, an error occurs in step S21TM4210). It is characterized by further including a game control microcomputer 100) for displaying. According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified.

The gaming machine of the means P2 is a gaming machine of the means P1, and the setting change mode control means satisfies the setting change condition (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state. , The lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state), the setting change mode can be controlled, and the power supply to the gaming machine is started. If the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (when it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set), the setting change condition is satisfied. It is possible to control the setting change mode without executing the error notification (based on the fact that all of the determinations are YES in step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140 when the power is turned on. The mode shifts to the setting change mode without shifting to the loop processing of steps S21TM420 to S21TM4220). According to this, when the condition controlled by the setting change mode is satisfied, the setting change mode is controlled without executing the error notification, and unnecessary error notification is avoided and the set value is appropriately set. You can encourage changes.

The gaming machine of the means P3 is a gaming machine of the means P1 or the means P2, and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (power supply). When it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of recovery that the setting changing flag is set), the error notification can be executed and the game can be stopped (when the power is turned on, the setting change mode is entered. If the transition condition is not satisfied (when NO is determined in any of steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140), the process proceeds to the loop processing of steps S21TM420 to step S21TM4220 without shifting to the setting change mode). It is characterized by that. According to this, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in a state where the set value is unstable, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

The gaming machine of the means P4 is any of the gaming machines selected from the means P1 to the means P3, and is a gaming control means for controlling the progress of the game (a gaming control microcomputer that executes a game control timer interrupt process). 100), an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) for controlling the execution of the effect, and the game control means includes a display means (display monitor 21TM029).
When the setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) and the specific information storage means are provided, and power supply to the game machine is started. When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (when it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set), the display means executes the error notification. At the same time, it is possible to send an error command to the effect control means (the setting value error error command can be sent in step S21TM4190, and the character "E" can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the error display of step S21TM4210. (It is possible), and the effect control means gives a notification prompting an operation for changing the set value in response to receiving the error command ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off" to the image display device 5. Please move to the setting change mode. ”) Is displayed. According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the clerk of the gaming hall, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside. In a gaming machine as described in JP-A-2010-20092 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. The inventions according to the means Q1 to the means Q5 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and provide a gaming machine that appropriately determines the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. To do.

The gaming machine of means Q1 is a gaming machine (pachinko) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for big hit determination is different). In the game machine 1), the setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed, and the setting change mode. Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can be specified to be controlled (the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the step is based on the end of the setting change mode. The game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in S21TM4720), and the specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (the specific information is stored). The value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102), and the setting change mode control means stores the specific information in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. When it is set (when it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set), the setting change mode is controlled (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state). Regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state is satisfied. , Automatically control to the setting change mode). According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode accompanied by the initialization of the gaming state, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately determined. The RAM is set based on the fact that the gaming machine of the means Q1 has the RAM clear flag set in the initialization means (for example, step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150) that initializes the gaming state in response to the control of the setting change mode. A game control microcomputer 100) that executes clearing (step S21TM1410) may be further provided.

The gaming machine of the means Q2 is a gaming machine of the means Q1, and the setting change mode control means stores the specific information in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. If not, the setting change mode is controlled based on the condition that the setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, if the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the frame for the gaming machine is used. 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1. (The clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, so that the RAM after the setting change mode ends (Clearing is executed)), the setting change mode is set based on the condition for shifting to the setting change mode), and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means. Controls the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied (when the setting changing flag is set at the time of turning on the power (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting change mode is set. Regardless of whether or not the conditions for transition are satisfied, the setting change mode is automatically controlled). According to this, when the power is cut off during the setting change mode control, the setting change mode is set even when the setting change condition is not satisfied based on the specific information stored at the time of power restoration. Since it will be controlled, workability can be improved.

The game machine of the means Q3 is a game machine of the means Q1 or the means Q2, and the setting change mode control means is a transition operation when the power supply to the game machine is started (setting is being changed when the power is turned on). When the flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (clear switch (setting). The changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, so that RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode ends), and the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied). It is possible to control, and the setting change mode is terminated based on a specific operation when the setting change mode is controlled (it was confirmed in step S21TM4680 that the lock switch 21TM051 was turned off). The specific information storage means stores the specific information when it is controlled to the setting change mode (sets the setting changing flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when the control of the setting change mode is started). ), The specific information is deleted when the setting change mode ends based on the specific operation (the setting changing flag is cleared at the timing of step S21TM4720 when the control of the setting change mode ends), and the setting change. The mode control means is the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the transition operation is performed when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started. (If the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), it is automatically controlled regardless of whether or not the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. Control to the setting change mode) and end the setting change mode based on the specific operation (end the setting change mode based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). It is characterized by. According to this, the conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode can be appropriately determined.

The gaming machine of the means Q4 is any of the gaming machines selected from the means Q1 to the means Q3, and is a set value for storing set values (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different). It is equipped with storage means (setting value storage area of RAM 102 in which setting values are stored), and can execute control according to the setting values stored in the setting value storage means (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.). Yes, the setting value stored in the setting value storage means is changed based on the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610). The setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed), and the setting change mode control means terminates the setting change mode based on a specific operation when the setting change mode is controlled (). The setting change mode is terminated based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680), and the setting value storage means performs the specific operation when controlled to the setting change mode. When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without being performed, the set value after being changed by the change operation in the setting change mode is continuously stored (the setting value storage area is the backup area of the RAM 102). When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is changed, so that the setting value itself is changed during the setting change mode. Even if the power is cut off, the set value after being changed by the change operation is retained). According to this, when the power supply is restarted, the set value after being changed by the change operation in the setting change mode before the power off occurs is stored in the set value storage means, and the set value corresponds to the set value. Workability can be improved because control is executed.

The gaming machine of the means Q5 is any of the gaming machines selected from the means Q1 to the means Q3, and is a set value for storing a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different). It is equipped with a storage means (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the set value is stored), and can execute control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (big hit determination process in special symbol process processing, etc.). The setting change mode control means stores the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled and (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value storage area is used. (Change only the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area, not the set value), and change the setting value stored in the setting value storage means based on the specific operation after the change operation. At the same time, the setting change mode is terminated (based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area at that time is stored in the setting value storage area. The setting value storage means is controlled to the setting change mode to the gaming machine without performing the specific operation. When the power supply is stopped, the setting value before the change operation is performed in the setting change mode is stored (even if the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the lock switch is used. Since the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is not changed unless 21TM051 is switched to OFF, if the power is cut off during the setting change mode, the setting value before being controlled to the setting change mode is used. It is characterized by being retained). According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode is not ended, the change of the setting value can be restricted.

(Explanation of feature section 052IW)
Next, the feature unit 052IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the feature unit 052IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the feature unit 052IW includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state, and in this feature unit 052IW, the gaming state is set to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). When it is controlled, when it is controlled to the first KT state (low probability / first KT state) with low probability, and when it is controlled to the first KT state (high probability / first KT state) with high probability. , High probability and may be controlled to the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

In the first KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, small hits are likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long, and small hits are made. Even if this occurs, there are very few cases where a game ball wins in the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and a high base state is controlled so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B becomes long. Further, in the second KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is placed on the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Easy to win. Specifically, in the second KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and a low base state is controlled so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened.

Further, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this feature unit 052IW, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. The rate of small hits is low when the first special symbol changes, while the rate of small hits is high when the second special symbol changes (however, it will be described later). (Except for the case of forced loss), the KT state is set to the gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player.

The configuration for setting the KT state to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state is the same as in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes. By configuring the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state, and the KT state is in the normal state. It may be in a gaming state in which it is more likely to be a small hit.

Further, the feature unit 052IW is configured so that the time required from the game ball passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation position of the passing gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the nail group forming the flow path of the game ball. Although details will be described later, the feature unit 052IW has a configuration in which the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to the open state based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41, and the game ball passes in the first KT state described later. The time from passing through the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passing gate 41. Since it is shorter than 0.6 seconds, which is the time required for the game to be played, when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state when one game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the first KT state, the one The game ball can be won in the variable winning ball device 6B as it is.

(Special variable winning ball device)
FIG. 10-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the special variable winning ball device 7 in the feature unit 052IW. As shown in FIG. 10-1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom surface member 052IW108 formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows, and the bottom surface member 052IW108 is provided in the jackpot game state. By moving the bottom member 052IW108 backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward, the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won a prize in the large winning opening is detected by the first count switch 23.

In the feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-1, the game ball winning in the large winning opening is further guided to the guidance path 052IW100 provided on the right side of the special variable winning ball device 7. The guidance path 052IW100 is further branched into two paths 052IW102,103, and the game ball guided to the guidance path 052IW100 is guided to the left path 052IW102 or the right path 052IW103. When guided to the left path 052IW102, the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 and is detected by the V region switch 052IW106. When guided to the right path 052IW103, the game ball enters the discharge area 052IW105 and is detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, a V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is provided near the entrance of the left side route 052IW102, and when the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is in the open state, a game guided to the guidance path 052IW100. The ball can enter the left path 052IW102 and enter the V region 052IW104. Further, when the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is in the closed state, the game ball guided by the guidance path 052IW100 enters the right side path 052IW103 and is discharged from the discharge area 052IW105 to the back side of the game area.

The V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 052IW109 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103).

Further, in the present feature unit 052IW, when controlled by the big hit game, the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, and is detected by the V area switch 052IW106 after the end of the big hit game. It is controlled to a probabilistic state.

The total number of game balls detected by the V area switch 052IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107 during one round matches the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. It should be. Therefore, the total number of game balls detected by the V area switch 052IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107 during one round does not match the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. In this case, it may be determined that a large winning opening / discharge mismatch error is made, and the error may be notified. In this case, since it takes some time for the game ball that has won a prize just before the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed to reach the V area 052IW104 or the discharge area 052IW105, the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state. If the number of game balls does not match by the time when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, it may be configured to determine a large winning opening / discharge mismatch error.

(Structure of control board)
FIG. 10-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like in the feature unit 052IW. In this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-2, the switch circuit 110 includes a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B), and a count switch (first count switch). In addition to the detection signals from the 23 and the second count switch 24)), the detection signals from the V area switch 052IW106 and the discharge area switch 052IW107 are taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

Further, in the feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-2, the solenoid circuit 111 uses the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 for the solenoid 81 for ordinary electric accessories and the big prize opening door. In addition to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening, transmission is performed to the solenoid 052IW109 for the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability)
10-3 and 10-4 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the big hit probability and the small hit probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 10-3 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, FIG. 10-4 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed to 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Not only when the setting can be changed in 6 steps, for example, the setting may be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or the setting may be changed in 7 or more steps.

First, with reference to FIG. 10-3, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), in the non-probability state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "247/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the winning probability of the jackpot is 10 times higher than that in the non-probability state (low probability state), which is set. When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "2470/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 (A) and 10-3 (B), regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the non-probability state (low probability). The small hit probability is constant as "6298/65536" regardless of whether it is a state) or a probabilistic state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probability change state and the probability change state. As shown in FIGS. 10-3 (A) and 10-3 (B), even if the jackpot probability is configured to be constant while the jackpot probability is different depending on the set value in this way, the missed probability is lost. By differentiating between the set values "1" and "6", the number of determined values for each set value may be matched.

Next, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-4. In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), in the non-probability state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "247/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the winning probability of the jackpot is 10 times higher than that in the non-probability state (low probability state), which is set. When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "2470/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 (A) and 10-4 (B), regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the non-probability state (low probability). The small hit probability is constant as "62986/65536" regardless of whether it is a state) or a probabilistic state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probability change state and the probability change state. However, in this example, in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 10-4), the small hit is compared with the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 10-3). The winning probability is about 10 times (that is, the number of judgment values for small hit determination when executing the variable display of the second special symbol is the small hit when executing the variable display of the first special symbol. More than the number of judgment values for judgment). As shown in FIGS. 10-4 (A) and 10-4 (B), even if the jackpot probability is configured to be constant while the jackpot probability is different depending on the set value in this way, the missed probability is lost. By differentiating between the set values "1" and "6", the number of determined values for each set value may be matched.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, the determination values corresponding to the deviations are included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values "1" to "6" (FIG. 10). As shown in -3 and FIG. 10-4, there is no set value at which the probability of loss is 0). The determination value corresponding to the deviation is different depending on the set value (as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, depending on which of the set values "1" to "6". , The probability of loss is different).

In addition, not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, for example, there may be a case where the probability of loss is 0 (that is, a set value that does not include the determination value corresponding to the loss). For example, in the set value "6" having the highest advantage (highest jackpot probability), the loss probability may be 0, and the determination value corresponding to the loss may not be included.

Further, not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, for example, there may be a case where the small hit probability is 0 (that is, a determination value that does not include the determination value corresponding to the small hit). For example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed (FIG. 10-3), the small hit probability may be uniformly set to 0 so that the judgment value for the small hit is not included. good.

In addition, in FIGS. 10-3 (A) and (B) and FIGS. 10-4 (A) and 10-4 (B), the small hit probability is the same between the probabilistic state (high probability state) and the non-probability state (low probability state). Although the probability of losing is different, in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the jackpot probability increases with respect to the non-probability change state (low probability state), so the small hit probability is higher than in the non-probability change state (low probability state). It may be lowered to match the probability of loss. Further, even if the set values are different in, for example, "1" and "2", the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched. As a result, in a gaming machine having a substantially number of configurable stages of less than 6 stages or a gaming machine having no difference in advantage due to the setting changing function, a gaming machine of a type having a setting changing function of 6 stages and a hardware / software configuration. Can be standardized and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Big hit type judgment table)
10-5 (A) and 10-5 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is set to "2R normal jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot" based on the random number for hit type determination. It is a table referred to to determine either "6R normal jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", or "10R probability variation jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), in the feature unit 052IW, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the variable display is executed. There is a 9% chance that it will be a "10R probability variation jackpot", a 56% chance that it will be a "6R probability variation jackpot", and a 35% chance that it will be a "6R normal jackpot". Further, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (B), in the feature unit 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6". Is determined to be a "10R probability variation jackpot" with a 10% probability, a "6R probability variation jackpot" with a 50% probability, a "2R probability variation jackpot" with a 5% probability, and a "2R probability variation jackpot" with a 35% probability. 2R normal jackpot "is determined.

The "10R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 10 rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Further, the "6R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Further, the "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

The "6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to a low probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Further, the "2R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and is controlled to a low probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

In this feature unit 052IW, when "10R probability variation jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", and "6R normal jackpot" are obtained, a predetermined period (30 seconds in this example) elapses in each round of the jackpot game. The large winning openings are controlled to be open until a fixed number of game balls (10 in this example) are won, and a maximum of 10 large winning openings can be won in each round. On the other hand, in the case of "2R probability variation big hit" and "2R normal big hit", the big winning opening is controlled to be open only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the big hit game. The number of winnings to the large winning openings that can be won in each round is about 2 to 3.

Further, in this feature unit 052IW, when the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to either the first KT state, the second KT state, or the non-KT state according to the game state before the big hit game and the big hit type. The method of transitioning the gaming state after the jackpot game will be described later (see FIGS. 10-29).

(Small hit type judgment table)
10-6 (A) and 10-6 (B) are explanatory views showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol, the small hit type is set to "small hit A" or "small hit B" based on the random number for determining the hit type. , Or a table referenced to determine either "small hit C".

As shown in FIG. 10-6 (A), in the feature unit 052IW, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the variable display is executed. It is determined as "small hit A" with a 100% probability. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (B), in this feature unit 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set. Is determined to be "small hit B" with a probability of 70%, and is determined to be "small hit C" with a probability of 30%.

In this example, as will be described later, in the case of "small hit A", the special winning opening is opened only for a very short 0.2 seconds during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-12), and the small hit game. You can hardly expect to win a game ball in the special winning opening. In the case of "small hit B", the special winning opening is opened for 0.8 seconds during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-13), and the game ball is won in the special winning opening during the small hit game. Can be expected to some extent. In the case of "small hit C", the special winning opening is opened for 1.8 seconds during the small hit game (see Fig. 10-14), and the game ball wins the special winning opening during the small hit game. Can be expected most.

(Variation pattern table)
10-7 to 10-9 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in the feature portion 052IW. The EXT shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9, nine types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 09 for the first special symbol and decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and decorative symbol. 34 types of # 01 to # 34 are used. Hereinafter, for example, when the fluctuation pattern #n (n = 01 to 09 or 01 to 34) is used, it means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the first special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (A) is shown. The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 06.

When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if it is in the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), it is shown in FIG. 10-7 (B). The variation pattern table for the first special symbol shown for KT is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-7 (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 07 to # 09.

When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the second special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 10-8 (C) is shown. The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03. Specifically, when it is determined to be out of alignment, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Further, when the small hit is determined, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Further, even when the big hit is determined, the second variation pattern # 03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

In this feature unit 052IW, even in the non-KT state, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, a situation occurs in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected due to the winning of the game ball to the special prize opening. Will end up. Therefore, in this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the fluctuation time is made extremely long and the execution frequency of the fluctuation display is executed. By reducing the number of small hits, the frequency of small hits is reduced, and the situation in which a small hit is aimed at winning a prize ball is prevented even though the player is in a non-KT state. In the feature unit 052IW, the "frequency of small hits" is, for example, the rate of occurrence of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, small hits per unit time. The rate of occurrence of is higher than the normal state.

In this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time even if it is a big hit. By making the time relatively long, 5 minutes, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming at the prize ball by unreasonably winning a prize in the special winning opening during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of a small hit, so the fluctuation time is configured to be shorter than in the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / first KT state is terminated. Select the fluctuation pattern table according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is to be executed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. 10-8 (D) is selected and varied. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 04 to # 06. Will be decided.

As shown in FIG. 10-8 (D), when it is determined that the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state is out of order, the second fluctuation pattern # 04 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds is used. It is determined. In addition, when it is determined that the small hit is the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 05 (second start winning opening opening), which is a relatively long fluctuation time of 7 seconds as the small hit, is opened. It is determined by the fluctuation pattern for preparation). In this feature unit 052IW, as already described, when controlled to the first KT state, the frequency of small hits increases, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning is actually achieved. The special winning opening in the ball device 17 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediately available. If the device 17 is controlled to be in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening. Therefore, in this feature unit 052IW, by securing a fluctuation time of at least 7 seconds in the first fluctuation of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 can be used even before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 17 to the open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member fall, it is possible to win a prize in the special winning opening. It prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the 1KT state. Further, when the big hit is determined as the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 minutes.

Further, in the case of executing the variation display of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is executed, FIG. 10-8 ( The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the 2nd to 49th fluctuations shown in E) is selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (E), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 49th variations of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation patterns # 07 to # 13 It will be decided by either. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (E), when it is determined that the variation is out of the range of the 2nd to 49th variations in the low probability / first KT state, the variation time is as short as 5 seconds, and the second variation pattern # of the shortened variation. It may be determined to be 07 or the second fluctuation pattern # 08 of shortened fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 1 second. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / 1st KT state are out of range, the 2nd fluctuation pattern # 09 with reach may be determined. Further, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / 1st KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, the second fluctuation pattern # 10 of the shortened fluctuation, and the fluctuation time is as short as 1 second. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 11 of the shortened fluctuation. On the other hand, when it is determined as a small hit as the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability / first KT state, it may be determined to be the second variation pattern # 12 with reach. The second variation patterns # 07 and # 10 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second variation patterns # 08 and # 11 store one or more second hold memories. It is a variation pattern that can be selected only when it is present. As a result, it is configured to accelerate the digestion of the reserved memory and increase the operating rate. Further, when the jackpot is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 13 with reach is determined.

In addition, the 50th variation display (that is, the final variation in the low probability / 1st KT state) is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed. If this is the case, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 50th variation shown in FIG. 10-8 (F) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 50th variation in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 14 to # 16. Will be decided.

In the feature unit 052IW, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, a character display such as "during chance time" is displayed on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when it is determined that the 50th fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state is a miss or a small hit, a character display such as "Chance time ends !!" is displayed on the image display device 5. It is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 14 or the second fluctuation pattern # 15 accompanied by the end display. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when a big hit is determined as the 50th variation of the low probability / first KT state, a character display such as "Chance time ends !!" is displayed on the image display device 5. It is determined to be the second variation pattern # 16 with a predetermined revival display after the end display to be performed.

In addition, in this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-7, when a big hit is obtained in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first fluctuation pattern # 07 having a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is used. It is configured to determine. This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is set as a long fluctuation time, Since the change of the second special symbol executed during the big hit change of the first special symbol is configured to be a forced loss, the forced loss occurs frequently even in the second KT state, and the player makes a small hit. You will not be able to receive any profits from. Therefore, in this feature unit 052IW, by setting the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol to a short fluctuation time, it is possible to shift to the jackpot gaming state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol before the forced loss occurs frequently. It is configured.

In addition, unlike the present feature unit 052IW, even if the change of the second special symbol is started during the big hit change of the first special symbol, the change of the second special symbol is not forcibly missed (for example, the first). If the gaming machine has a configuration in which the second special symbol is forcibly removed when the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol jackpot symbol is stopped), the fluctuation time of the first special symbol jackpot during the KT state. May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a jackpot occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot is set to the same short fluctuation time as the outlier, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from small hits. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time that at least a plurality of small hits can occur. (For example, 1 minute) is configured to be secured.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the variation after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is completed. Select the variation pattern table according to the number of times. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is to be executed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. 10-9 (G) is selected and varied. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 17 to # 21. Will be decided.

As in the case of the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (G), the fluctuation time is also determined to be out of the first fluctuation in the high probability / first KT state. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 17 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 5 seconds. On the other hand, even when it is determined that the first variation in the high probability / first KT state is out of order, it may be determined in the second variation pattern # 18 with reach. Further, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the variation pattern for preparing to open the second starting winning opening (second variation pattern # 19) may be determined. On the other hand, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 20 with reach may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (G), when the jackpot is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 21 with reach is determined.

Further, in the case of executing the variation display after the second variation after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is executed, the high shown in FIG. 10-9 (H) is executed. Probability / The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the first KT and the second and subsequent fluctuations is selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (H), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second variation or later in the high probability / first KT state, any of the second variation patterns # 22 to # 28. Will be decided.

As in the case of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / 1st KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (H), when it is determined that the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / 1st KT state are out of order, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (H). It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 22 of the shortened fluctuation having a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds or the second fluctuation pattern # 23 of the shortened fluctuation having a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second variation or the second variation in the high probability / first KT state is out of order, the second variation pattern # 24 with reach may be determined. Further, when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is shortened to 5 seconds, the second fluctuation pattern # 25, and the fluctuation time is further shortened to 1 second. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 26 of the fluctuation. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 27 with reach may be determined. The second fluctuation patterns # 22 and # 25 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second fluctuation patterns # 23 and # 26 store one or more second hold storages. It is a variation pattern that can be selected only when it is present. As a result, it is configured to accelerate the digestion of the reserved memory and increase the operating rate. Further, when the jackpot is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 28 with reach is determined.

When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, in the case of the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 10-9 (I) is displayed. It is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 29 to # 34. ..

As shown in FIG. 10-9 (I), when the deviation is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 29 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. In some cases, the fluctuation time is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 30 of the normal fluctuation of 5 seconds. On the other hand, when it is determined to be out of the high probability / second KT state, it may be determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 31 with reach. Further, when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the fluctuation time is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 32 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 1.5 seconds, or the fluctuation time is usually 5 seconds. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 33 of the fluctuation. Further, when the jackpot is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 34 with reach is determined.

When determining the variation pattern, more specifically, it depends on which variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is to be executed, the current gaming state, and the variable display result. Using the variation pattern table, a lottery process is performed based on a random number for determining the variation pattern, and which variation pattern is used is determined. FIG. 10-10 is for determining the fluctuation pattern when the variable display result is a small hit in the fluctuation pattern table for the second special symbol for high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 10-9 (I). It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits.

As shown in FIG. 10-10, in this feature unit 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the high probability / second KT state, and when the variation display which is a small hit is executed, the variation display is executed. , Regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the second variation pattern # 32 is determined with a probability of 70%, and the second variation pattern # 33 is determined with a probability of 30%. Therefore, in this example, in the case of the second KT state, there is a high probability that the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is selected.

In addition, in FIG. 10-10, as an example, the variation pattern table in the case of executing the small hit variation of the second special symbol during the high probability / second KT state is shown, but FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9 show. The other variation pattern tables shown are also configured in the same manner, and each variation pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6".

In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-8 to 10-10, a shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the first KT state, and a shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is performed with a high probability in the case of the second KT state. It shows the case where it is configured to be executed in, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to execute a shortened variation of 5 seconds or 1 second in a low probability state and a shortened variation of 1.5 seconds in a high probability state.

(Opening pattern of special variable winning ball device 7)
Next, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 will be described. FIG. 10-11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7. First, using FIG. 10-11 (1), a special variable winning ball when controlled by a jackpot game based on a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, and a 2R probability variation jackpot (hereinafter, also simply referred to as "probability variation jackpot"). The opening pattern of the device 7 will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is in the open state. Is controlled by. Then, if the game ball wins a prize while the large winning opening is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23.

Further, in the big hit game based on the probabilistic big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), when the winning of the second game ball to the big winning opening is detected in the first round, the solenoid 052IW109 is driven and V. The area opening / closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to be in the open state, and the game ball can enter the V area 052IW104. Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has passed or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings to the large winning openings are detected in the first round, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), special When the variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is controlled to be closed again and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed, the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is also controlled to be closed.

When the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 and is detected by the V area switch 052IW106 within a predetermined detection valid period, the game state is controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the predetermined detection valid period is started at the timing when the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to be in the open state, and the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 It is a period until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses after the control to the closed state again.

Next, using FIG. 10-11 (2), opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 when controlled to a big hit game based on a 6R normal big hit and a 2R normal big hit (hereinafter, also simply referred to as "normal big hit"). The pattern will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is in the open state. Is controlled by. Then, if the game ball wins a prize while the large winning opening is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23.

Further, in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), when the winning of the first game ball to the big winning opening is detected in the first round, the solenoid 052IW109 is driven and V. The region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to be open for an extremely short period (0.02 seconds in this example). Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has passed or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings to the large winning openings are detected in the first round, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), special The variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is controlled to be closed again, and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), in the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot, the predetermined detection valid period is after an extremely short opening period (0.02 seconds in this example) of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101. It is a period until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is long. Therefore, the game ball easily enters the V region 052IW104 during the predetermined detection valid period, and is easily controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is extremely short. Therefore, it is practically difficult for the game ball to enter the V region 052IW104 during the predetermined detection valid period, and it is extremely rare that the game ball is controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game. Therefore, in this example, in the jackpot game based on the probabilistic jackpot, the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 at a higher rate during the jackpot game as compared with the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot.

Next, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. 10-12 to 10-14 are explanatory views for explaining the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. Of these, FIG. 10-12 shows the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit A. Further, FIG. 10-13 shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit B. Further, FIG. 10-14 shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit C. Further, FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1) show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, respectively, and FIGS. 10-12 (2) show. 10-14 (2) show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state, respectively.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1). As shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, it is normal in the normal symbol display 20. When the variable display of the symbol is executed and it is determined to be a normal symbol, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined to be off, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. Will be done. In this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 0.2 seconds, and the winning symbol and the missing symbol are derived and displayed. The time is set to 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), the second start winning opening is opened after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed. After the pre-processing time of 0.1 seconds has elapsed, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, in the case of the small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-12 (1). , In the case of a small hit B, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and in the case of a small hit C, FIG. As shown in -14 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening (however, in the case of small hit A, it is in a state where it can be won. , Since the special variable winning ball device 17 opens only for an extremely short 0.2 seconds, almost no winning can be expected). However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is as short as 0.2 seconds, 0.8 seconds, or 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is completed, the next variable winning ball device 6B can be opened. After at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the fluctuation time of the next normal symbol of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the pre-processing time of the second start winning opening of 0.1 seconds, has elapsed. be. Therefore, in the feature unit 052IW, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

Further, in the feature unit 052IW, in the first KT state, after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state. After 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening pre-opening processing time of 0.1 seconds, the game ball The time required from passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 to the time when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state in the state where the normal symbol is not changed is longer. Since the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 to when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B is shorter than the time when the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is already open. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B when the state is controlled. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed is likely to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2). As shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, it is normal in the normal symbol display 20. When the variable display of the symbol is executed and it is determined to be a normal symbol, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined to be off, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. Will be done. In this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 1.0 second, and the winning symbol and the missing symbol are derived and displayed. The time is set to 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), the second start winning opening is opened after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed. After the pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds has elapsed, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, in the case of the small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-12 (2). , In the case of a small hit B, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and in the case of a small hit C, FIG. As shown in -14 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is as short as 0.2 seconds. Further, in the feature unit 052IW, in the second KT state, the interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened is at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol variation time 1.0 second + symbol confirmation time 0). A relatively long period of .2 seconds + time before the opening process of the second start winning opening is 2.6 seconds) is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long. Compared to the first KT state, the game ball is more likely to enter the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side, and the game ball is more likely to win the special winning opening. However, in the case of the small hit A, since the special variable winning ball device 17 opens only for an extremely short 0.2 seconds, it can hardly be expected that the game ball will win the special winning opening even in the second KT state.

In the second KT state, the game ball is easy to win in the special winning opening and the prize ball is easily obtained. Therefore, in this example, it is also called "small hit RUSH", and in the second KT state, "small hit RUSH". Character display such as "is displayed.

Further, in this example, a case has been shown in which the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is different depending on which of the small hit types A to C is the small hit type. I can't be limited. For example, the number of times the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened may be different depending on whether the small hit type is a small hit A to C. In this case, for example, in the case of small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only once during the small hit game, whereas in the case of small hit B or small hit C, during the small hit game. The special variable winning ball device 17 may be configured to be opened 2 to 11 times. Further, for example, even if the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is short to some extent, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) can be opened by executing the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17 four times for 0.4 seconds. ) May be configured to provide a small hit type in which a game ball can win a prize, and various aspects can be considered. Further, in this example, the case where the small hit types are three types of small hits A to C is shown, but the case is not limited to such a mode, and for example, four or more types of small hit types are configured to be provided. May be good.

Further, in the feature unit 052IW, in the second KT state, after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state. After the lapse of 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1.0 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time of 2.6 seconds before opening the second start winning opening, the game ball The time required from passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 to the time when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state in the state where the normal symbol is not changed is longer. Since it is longer than the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 until the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B before being controlled by. Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

In the feature unit 052IW, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbol and controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is the normal symbol process process by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103). (See step S26) is executed. Further, in the normal symbol process processing of step S26, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the game state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), and whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state, or a second KT state. Regardless of whether or not there is a big hit game state, it is determined whether or not to make a normal hit with the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%).

In this feature unit 052IW, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same for 0.2 seconds each in the first KT state and the second KT state, and the time before the second start winning opening opening process is the second. The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B is different by making it as short as 0.1 seconds in the 1KT state and as long as 2.6 seconds in the second KT state has been shown, but only in such an embodiment. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be different by making the fluctuation time and the symbol determination time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after closing the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be controllable, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process differs between the first KT state and the second KT state. By making it different, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be different. In particular, if the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state is configured to have a shorter closing period (interval period) by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress winning of the special winning opening in the first KT state. ..

As will be described later, in the feature unit 052IW, in the first KT state, by setting a high base flag indicating that the high base state is set, the high base state is controlled, and FIGS. 10-12 (1) to FIGS. As shown in 10-14 (1), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be long. Further, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2) by controlling the low base state without setting the high base flag. It is controlled so that the time is shortened.

For example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-. The variable winning ball device 6B as shown in 14 (1) is controlled by the first opening pattern (long opening) in which the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a long time, and if the special flag is not set, FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14. The variable winning ball device 6B shown in (2) may be configured to be controlled by a second opening pattern (short opening) in which the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a short time. That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may not be set in other states including the big hit game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened when the final variation display in the low probability / first KT state is executed. For example, in the 50 times shortened fluctuation period of the low probability / first KT state, the above-mentioned special flag may be deleted according to the 49th stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the variable winning ball device 6B being long open when performing a left-handed notification after the end of the low probability / first KT state. be able to.

As described above, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured by using the flag (special flag) for opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B, the flag for shortening the variation display of the special symbol is further used. The variation display of the special symbol may be controlled. In this case, the special flag and the flag for shortened variation may be managed and controlled separately.

Further, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be short-opened in the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to have a high opening probability in a low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. It is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 6B from winning a prize, and it is possible to prevent a right-handed operation from being performed during a low probability / non-KT state.

In this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed in the first KT state, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped and there is no hold memory of the normal symbol. This is because the device 6B is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the second special symbol at the timing of stopping the fluctuation (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the passing gate By the time the game ball that has passed through 41 reaches the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, the variable winning ball device 6B does not open, and the special winning opening can be won). On the other hand, in this feature unit 052IW, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. Is set to start, so that it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit generation timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

(Direction control command)
10-15 and 10-16 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIGS. 10-15, the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H) are decoratives that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. This is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of a symbol. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H), the image display device 5 starts variable display of the decorative pattern. Control.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is out of alignment. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (10R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the 10R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the 6R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the 6R normal jackpot. .. The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the 2R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the 2R normal jackpot. .. The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this feature unit 052IW, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a display result specification command immediately before the variation pattern command, so that the display result specification command received by the effect control CPU 120 immediately before the first variation pattern command is Since it can be determined that the command is the display result specification command for the first special symbol, and the display result specification command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be the display result specification command for the second special symbol, the display result is displayed. The designated command can be used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the display result designation command for the first special symbol and the display result designation command for the second special symbol may be separated.

Further, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send a display result designation command, but corresponds to each of 10R probability variation jackpot / 6R probability variation jackpot / 6R normal jackpot / 2R probability variation jackpot / 2R normal jackpot / small hit / miss. The variation pattern command may be determined, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command 9C00 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) for designating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 has ended. The command 9C01 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) for designating that the right-handed display 26 has started lighting.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

The command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. The command A003 (H) is an effect control command (second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped.

The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the jackpot game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of the big winning opening) for designating the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. A command indicating the first reserved storage number may be transmitted as the first valid start prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved storage number may be transmitted as the second valid start winning prize designation command. Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second valid start prize designation command are commands indicating that the start prize has been given.

The command C801 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage designation command) for designating that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

The command D000 (H) is an effect control command (first customer) that specifies that it is in the first customer waiting state (the state in which the first special symbol is not changed and the first hold storage is not stored). Wait demo display specification command). The command D001 (H) is an effect control command (second customer) that specifies that it is in the second customer waiting state (the state in which the second special symbol is not changed and the second hold storage is not stored). Wait demo display specification command). The first customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Further, the second customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the low probability / non-KT state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the high probability / first KT state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the high probability / second KT state.

The command E1XX (H) is an effect control command (setting value command) for designating the currently set setting value. A set value is set in "XX". For example, when the set value is set to "1", the command E101 (H) is transmitted as the set value command. Further, for example, when the set value is set to "6", the command E106 (H) is transmitted as the set value command.

When the effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 10-15 and 10-16, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13. It should be noted that the effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 10-15 and 10-16 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating a game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

(1st special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A, it means that the first special symbol display device 4A does not display the variation of the first special symbol.

In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 052IWS50A). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step 052IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved storage counter is confirmed. If the first reserved storage number is 0, the first customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS52A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and the RAM 102. (Step 052IWS53A), the value of the first reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step 052IWS54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the first reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order of the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are used. The order of extraction is also stored so that it can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 052IWS55A). In this example, by executing the process of step 052IWS55A, the setting value command is transmitted every time the fluctuation display is started, but the setting change process (process of changing the set value) when the power is turned on. The setting value command is also sent when is executed.

The timing of sending the setting value command is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, the setting value command is configured to be transmitted at each end of the fluctuation display, or the setting value command is transmitted during the fluctuation display. It may be configured to do so.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS56A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability / non-KT, and the low probability / non-KT background specification command is executed. In some cases, it is determined that it is in the low probability / first KT state, and the low probability / first KT background specification command is executed. If the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off, the high probability / second KT state is determined and the high probability / second KT background specification command is executed. Send.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step 052IWS57A). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating that the jackpot is a big hit is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step 052IWS69A without performing the processing after step 052IWS58A. As a result, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, it is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, when the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress in step 052IWS57A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order as a random number for hit determination is performed, and the process proceeds to step 052IWS59A at the time of starting winning. Regardless of which hit determination random number has been acquired, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, for example, when the big hit fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress in step 052IWS57A, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as a random number for hit determination without performing the processing of steps 052IWS58A to S63A. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the first random number storage buffer (step 052IWS58A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 052IWS59A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a hit determination random number is a jackpot if it matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step 052IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 052IWS61A). .. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot based on the hit type determination random number (step 052IWS62A), the jackpot type is stored (step 052IWS63A), and step 052IWS69A. Move to.

If the big hit is not made in step 052IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 052IWS64A). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit is determined when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 052IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 052IWS65A). Step 052IWS66A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 052IWS67A), and stores the small hit type (step 052IWS68A). In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be small hit A (see FIG. 10-6 (A)). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS69A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is "0" (step 052IWS69A), and if it is "0", step 052IWS75A. Move to. When the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step 052IWS70A). It is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step 052IWS71A). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 052IWS75A. When the value of the high-base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high-base flag indicating that it is in the high-base state (step 052IWS72A), and shortens the variation display of the special symbol. The special figure time reduction flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step 052IWS73A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 is extended until the end of the fluctuation (step 052IWS74A). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS75A.

In this feature unit 052IW, as will be described later, it is highly probable that the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the fluctuation display in the high base state is managed at the end of the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit. / It is a case where it is controlled to a high base state (low probability / first KT state) and the variation display is executed 50 times. In the case of the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), when the 50th variation display is started, it is determined as Y in steps 052IWS71A and S71B, and the high base flag is set in steps 052IWS72A and S72B. At the same time as being reset, the special time saving flag is also reset in steps 052IWS73A and S73B, and the state shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)).

The lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is for continuing the right-handed notification and continuing the right-handed state, and although the high base state has ended as the game state, the fluctuation shortening common to the first KT state. It is a flag for making the production background common to the first KT state while making it a state.

In this example, by executing the process of step 052IWS74A or the process of step 052IWS74B described later, the fluctuation start of either the first special symbol variation display or the second special symbol variation display causes a high base state. When the final fluctuation of the above (in this example, the 50th fluctuation display) is started, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set and the fluctuation shortening state is extended. In this case, when the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set, whether the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol (in this example, the 50th variation display) ends. , Or the other special symbol variation display (in this example, the 51st variation display) is reset, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is reset, and the extension of the variation shortening state is configured to end. Is desirable.

Then, in step 052IWS75A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step 052IWS75A). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step 052IWS75A is confirmed.

In step 052IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

(1st fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, first, whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is set with the special figure time reduction flag indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is being shortened. (Step 052IWS1700A). In this example, it is more advantageous to execute the second special symbol variation display by setting the special symbol time reduction flag and performing the shortening control of the variation display of the special symbol (FIG. 10-7). (Refer to FIG. 10-9), since a small hit is likely to occur, the state is controlled to the KT state. If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the non-variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A) as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. The first special symbol variation pattern table for KT is selected (step 052IWS1701A). If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (B) as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. The first special symbol variation pattern table for time is selected (step 052IWS1702A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 052IWS1701A and S1702A, and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. It is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 10-7 is to be used (step 052IWS1703A). In this example, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, after the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1704A).

Further, when the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step 052IWS1703A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first fluctuation time timer and the fluctuation time. (Step 052IWS1705A), and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is started (step 052IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to the value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 052IWS1707A).

(1st special symbol change processing)
FIG. 10-19 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120) (step 052IWS1120A). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not yet been transmitted, and the jackpot type. Based on the decision result, one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 7 designation command) is sent to the effect control CPU 120. Control to transmit to (step 052IWS1121A).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first fluctuation time timer (step 052IWS1122A), and when the first fluctuation time timer times out (step 052IWS1123A), controls to send the first symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1123A). Step 052IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 052IWS1130A).

If the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS1125A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS1126A). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B, the process is terminated as it is.

If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit (step 052IWS1127A). .. It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the first big hit flag is set. If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit type is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 6R probability variable jackpot (step 052IWS1128A). Whether or not it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A. If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot, the process ends as it is.

When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (Y of step 052IWS1125A) or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y of step 052IWS1126A), either the 10R probability variation jackpot or the 6R probability variation jackpot is displayed. When the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed (Y of step 052IWS1127A, N of step 052IWS1128A), the CPU 103 causes the effect control CPU 120 to have the first compulsory symbol. Control is performed to send a confirmation designation command (step 052IWS1129A). In this case, if the first big hit flag or the first small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the first big hit flag or the first small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 052IWS1130A).

By executing the processes of steps 052IWS1125A to S1129A, in this feature unit 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the first special symbol, which is a normal jackpot (6R normal jackpot in this example), is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and the first special symbol is executed. And the second special symbol do not cause a big hit or a small hit at the same time. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly missed, the decorative symbol changes based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 052IWS1129A. As a display result, it is controlled to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol.

In this example, the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the probability variation jackpot (in this example, the 10R probability variation jackpot or the 6R probability variation jackpot). If the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y in step 052IWS1128A), but in this case, the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed. Based on the small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S126), and the game shifts to the small hit game. Therefore, after the next timer interruption, it is determined as N in step 052IWS1120A, the processing of steps 052IWS1121A to S1130A is skipped, and the first variable time timer of step 052IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a probable variable jackpot, is being executed, the first variation time timer is during the small hit game. The update of the first special symbol is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a miss or a small hit is performed. Even if there is, the first special symbol variation processing is terminated as it is (see N in step 052IWS1127A). Therefore, even when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being executed, the first variation is performed during the small hit game. The update of the time timer is interrupted, the variation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hit game is completed, the update of the first variation time timer is restarted.

(1st special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-20 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop process. In the first special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 052IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 052IWS2011A). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2012A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2013A).

In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, when the game state is controlled to the KT state, the person who performs the right-handed operation. Is advantageous for the player, and the right-handed display 26 is turned on. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is turned on during the low probability / first KT state, but the 50th variation display is displayed by executing the processes of steps 052IWS69A to S74A and S69B to S74B. When starting, the low probability / first KT state is terminated to shift to the normal state (non-KT state), and the processes of steps 052IWS2010A to S2013A and S2010B to S2013B are executed to end the 50th variation display. The right-handed display 26 is turned off.

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS2014A). In this case, if the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 052IWS1129A of the first special symbol variation processing, it is compulsory as a stop symbol of the first special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of the variation. The out-of-target design is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step 052IWS2015A). When the first big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the big hit start flag indicating that the big hit is started (step 052IWS2016A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first jackpot flag (step 052IWS2017A).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2018A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2019A). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027A.

Step 052 By executing the processing of IWS2018A and S2019A, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to light when a big hit is made in the variation display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on.

In this example, after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the jackpot game is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. Therefore, right-handed at the timing when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41. It may be configured to start lighting the display 26.

When the first big hit flag is not set (N in step 052IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first small hit flag is set (step 052IWS2020A). When the first small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2021A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 052IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step 052IWS2026A). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027A.

In this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is inherently advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the small hit game. However, as already explained, when a small hit is made in the variable display of the first special symbol, the small hit type is only a small hit A, and it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to win the special winning opening. Therefore, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right-handed display 26 is not lit and the right-handed lighting start designation command is not transmitted.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step 052IWS2027A).

In this example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, the right-handed notification that urges the player to launch the game ball to the right of the game area can be executed. There is. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol, a launch promotion notification that urges the player to launch the game ball aiming at the passing gate 41 can be executed as a right-handed notification. May be.

In addition, right-handed notification and launch promotion notification are not executed when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, and right-handed notification and launch promotion notification are performed when a game ball wins in the first start winning opening in that state. (In this case, since the gate is waiting to pass through, even if the game ball wins in the first start winning opening, the change display of the first special symbol is not started immediately, and the first hold memory is used). It may be configured as.

On the contrary, when the passage of the game ball at the passing gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is low (for example, low volume sound output or small screen display). Therefore, the player may be configured to perform a left-handed notification urging the player to launch and operate the game ball to the left of the game area. On the other hand, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is high (for example, loud sound output or It may be configured to perform left-handed notification by (large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, with the above configuration, a player who accidentally launches a game ball to the right of the game area is given a slight left-handed notification in a mode in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is low. , The player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation may be configured to perform the left-handed notification in a manner in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the gaming machine is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation to return to the left-handed operation from the clerk of the game store.

Further, in the above case, the left-handed notification may be performed when the number of detected game balls at the passing gate 41, the second starting winning opening, and the special winning opening reaches a certain number. In addition, when the passing gate 41 detects a game ball a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), a left-handed notification is given, and at the second start winning opening and the special winning opening, the number exceeds a predetermined number. It may be configured to give a left-handed notification when a small number (for example, one) or more of game balls are detected.

In this feature unit 052IW, the demo display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied, but when the demo display is performed in the normal state, the passage gate 41, the second start winning opening, or the special winning opening is displayed. When the winning of the game ball is detected, the execution of the demo display that has been executed may be terminated and the left-handed notification may be performed.

(2nd special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 10-21 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol normal process in the second special symbol process process. The state in which the second special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing. When the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, there is a state in which the second special symbol display device 4B does not display the variation of the second special symbol.

In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 052IWS50B). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step 052IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage counter is confirmed. If the second hold storage number is 0, the second customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS52B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and the RAM 102. (Step 052IWS53B), the value of the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step 052IWS54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the second reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order of the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 052IWS55B). In this example, by executing the process of step 052IWS55B, the setting value command is transmitted every time the fluctuation display is started, but the setting change process (process of changing the set value) when the power is turned on. The setting value command is also sent when is executed.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS56B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step 052IWS56A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress (step 052IWS57B). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step 052IWS69B without performing the processing after step 052IWS58B. As a result, when the change of the second special symbol is started during the change of the big hit of the first special symbol, it is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress in step 052IWS57B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order as a random number for hit determination is performed, and the process proceeds to step 052IWS59B. It may be forcibly removed regardless of whether or not a random number for hit determination has been acquired.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is being changed in step 052IWS57B, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as a random number for hit determination without performing the processing of steps 052IWS58B to S63B. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the second random number storage buffer (step 052IWS58B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 052IWS59B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a hit determination random number is a jackpot if it matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step 052IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 052IWS61B). .. Then, based on the random number for determining the hit type, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, a 2R probability variable jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot (step 052IWS62B), and the jackpot type is stored (step 052IWS63B). ), The process proceeds to step 052IWS69B.

If the big hit is not made in step 052IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 052IWS64B). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit is determined when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 052IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 052IWS65B). Step 052IWS66B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 052IWS67B), and stores the small hit type (step 052IWS68B). In this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be small hit B or small hit C (see FIG. 10-6 (B)). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS69B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 052IWS69B), and if it is "0", the process proceeds to step 052IWS75B. When the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step 052IWS70B). It is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step 052IWS71B). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 052IWS75B. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 052IWS72B), and shortens the variation display of the special symbol. The special figure time reduction flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step 052IWS73B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 052IWS74B). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS75B.

Then, in step 052IWS75B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern setting process (step 052IWS75B). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step 052IWS75B is confirmed.

In step 052IWS59B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) shown in FIG. 10-18. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 10-18, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process is explained. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first performs the same process as in step 052IWS1700A, and confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set. If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the non-variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-8 (C) as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. Select the second special symbol variation pattern table for KT. If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 varies depending on whether or not the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set and the number of variations. As the variation pattern table for determining the pattern, any one of the variation pattern tables for KT shown in FIGS. 10-8 (D) to 10-9 (I) is selected for the second special symbol variation pattern table. For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability / first KT state), the first variation is the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10-8 (D). Select, and if it is the 2nd to 49th variation, select the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10-8 (E), and if it is the 50th variation, select the second variation shown in FIG. 10-8 (F). Select the variable pattern table for special symbols. Further, for example, if both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability / first KT state), the first variation is the variation for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10-9 (G). The pattern table is selected, and if it is the second variation or later, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10-9 (H) is selected. Further, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (high probability / second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-9 (I) is selected.

(2nd special symbol change processing)
FIG. 10-22 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120) (step 052IWS1120B). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not been transmitted yet, and the jackpot type. Based on the decision result, one of the display result specification commands (display result 1 specified command, display result 2 specified command, display result 3 specified command, display result 5 specified command, display result 6 specified command, display result 7 specified command) Is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second fluctuation time timer (step 052IWS1122B), and when the second fluctuation time timer times out (step 052IWS1123B), controls to transmit the second symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1123B). Step 052IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 052IWS1130B).

When the second fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS1125B). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, that the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS1126B). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, that the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the first small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the process is terminated as it is.

If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit (step 052IWS1127B). .. It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the second big hit flag is set. If the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit type is a 10R probable big hit, a 6R probable big hit, or a 2R probable big hit (step 052IWS1128B). .. Whether or not it is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63B. If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the process ends as it is.

When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (Y of step 052IWS1125B), or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y of step 052IWS1126B), the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, and When the variation display of the second special symbol that is neither a 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, a 2R normal jackpot) is being executed (Y in step 052IWS1127B, N in step 052IWS1128B), the CPU 103 is the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed to send the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to (step 052IWS1129B). In this case, if the second big hit flag or the second small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the second big hit flag or the second small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 052IWS1130B).

By executing the processes of steps 052IWS1125B to S1129B, in this feature unit 052IW, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the second special symbol, which is a normal jackpot (2R normal jackpot in this example), is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and the first special symbol is executed. And the second special symbol do not cause a big hit or a small hit at the same time. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly missed, the decorative symbol changes based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 052IWS1129B. As a display result, it is controlled to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol.

In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the probability variation jackpot (in this example, the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, Or, if the variation display of the second special symbol that becomes the 2R probability variation jackpot) is being executed, the second special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y in step 052IWS1128B), but in this case, the first special symbol is executed. Based on the fact that the variable display of the symbol becomes a small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S126), and the game shifts to the small hit game. Therefore, after the next timer interruption, it is determined as N in step 052IWS1120B, the processing of steps 052IWS1121B to S1130B is skipped, and the second variable time timer of step 052IWS1122B is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a probable variable jackpot, is being executed, the second variation time timer is during the small hit game. The update of the second special symbol is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol which becomes a miss or a small hit is performed. Even if there is, the second special symbol variation processing is terminated as it is (see N in step 052IWS1127B). Therefore, even when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being executed, the second variation is performed during the small hit game. The update of the time timer is interrupted, the variation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hit game is completed, the update of the second variation time timer is restarted.

By configuring as described above, in the normal state after the end of the first KT state (after the end of the reduced working hours state), the remaining second reserved memory can be digested, and a big hit occurs at an unintended timing in which the player is absent. Can be suppressed.

Further, a variable winning ball device for the first special symbol is provided below the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning opening), and a winning ball device for the second special symbol is provided on the right side of the gaming area (a winning ball device for the second special symbol). In a gaming machine configured to provide a starting winning slot, which is not a variable winning ball device, and to shift to a normal state via a time-saving state of the first special symbol after the end of the second KT state (small hit RUSH). , As described above, a configuration in which the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed may be applied. In this case, as the fluctuation efficiency of the first special symbol increases, the frequency of small hits based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol also increases, but the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is forcibly missed accordingly. By increasing the frequency of this, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of variable display of the second special symbol based on the second reserved memory in the normal state, and further suppress the occurrence of big hits at unintended timings when the player is absent. Can be done.

(2nd special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-23 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol stop process. In the second special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 052IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 052IWS2011B). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2012B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS2014B). In this case, if the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 052IWS1129B of the second special symbol variation processing, it is compulsory as a stop symbol of the second special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of the variation. The out-of-target design is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second jackpot flag is set (step 052IWS2015B). When the second big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the big hit start flag (step 052IWS2016B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second big hit flag (step 052IWS2017B).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2018B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2019B). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027B.

Step 052 By executing the processing of IWS2018B and S2019B, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to light when a big hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on.

When the second big hit flag is not set (N in step 052IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small hit flag is set (step 052IWS2020B). When the second small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2021B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 052IWS2022B).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 052IWS2023B). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2024B), and is right with respect to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed to send a lighting start designation command (step 052IWS2025B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step 052IWS2026B). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027B.

Step 052 By executing the processing of IWS2024B and S2025B, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to light when a small hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is better for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the small hit game. It is advantageous, and the right-handed display 26 is turned on.

However, in this example, even if a small hit is obtained in the variation display of the second special symbol, the right-handed display 26 should already be lit when the KT state is in effect. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination process of step 052IWS2023B, if a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol during the KT state, the right-handed display 26 is started to light in duplicate. Or right-handed lighting start specification command is not sent.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 052IWS2027B).

(Characteristic control normal processing)
FIG. 10-24 is a flowchart showing a bonus control normal process (step S120) in the bonus control process process. In the accessory control normal process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the jackpot start flag is set (step 052IWS2101). If the jackpot start flag is not set, the process ends as it is.

If the jackpot start flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot start flag (step 052IWS2102). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer before opening the big winning opening (step 052IWS2103), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the big hit type (step 052IWS2104), and sets the round number counter indicating the number of big hit rounds to "1". "(Step 052IWS2105).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting process (step 052IWS2106).

(Waiting for gate passage)
FIG. 10-25 is a flowchart showing a gate passage waiting process (step S121) in the accessory control process process. In the gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has been input (step 052IWS2501). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the process ends as it is. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag, the high base flag, and the special time saving flag if set, and clears the value of the high base count counter to 0 ( Step 052IWS2502). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (step 052IWS2503), and sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step 052IWS2504).

In this feature unit 052IW, the jackpot game is not started immediately when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the second special symbol by executing the gate passage waiting process, but the game is played through the passage gate 41. It is configured to shift to the jackpot game on condition that the ball has passed and is detected by the gate switch 21.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 10-26 is a flowchart showing a jackpot opening process (step S123) in the accessory control process process. In the process of opening the jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the first count switch 23 is in the ON state (step 052IWS2401). If the first count switch 23 is in the ON state, that is, if the game ball that has won the big prize opening is detected, the CPU 103 has a winning number for counting the number of the game balls that have won the big prize opening. The value of the counter is added by 1 (step 052IWS2402). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the large winning opening winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2403).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V area switch 052IW106 is in the ON state (step 052IWS2404). If the V area switch 052IW106 is in the ON state, that is, if the game ball that has entered the V area 052IW104 is detected, the CPU 103 sets a V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the V area 052IW104. (Step 052IWS2405).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the winning number counter is 10 (step 052IWS2406). If the value of the winning number counter is 10, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2409. If the value of the winning number counter is not 10, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the large winning opening (step 052IWS2407), and the opening time timer after the subtraction times out. Check whether or not (step 052IWS2408). If the open time timer has not timed out, the process ends as it is.

When the value of the winning number counter is 10 (Y in step 052IWS2406) or when the open time timer times out (Y in step 052IWS2408), the CPU 103 drives the solenoid 82 for the big winning door. It is stopped and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed (step 052IWS2409). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit a display command after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2410). Further, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the round number counter (step 052IWS2411).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the post-processing after opening the jackpot (step 052IWS2412).

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 10-27 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end process (step S125) in the accessory control process process. In the big hit end process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step 052IWS2200), and if the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2202. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 corresponds to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) in which the big hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 on the big hit end display timer. The value is set (step 052IWS2201), and the process ends.

In step 052IWS2202, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 052IWS2202). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 052IWS2203). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS2203), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V winning flag is set (step 052IWS2204). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag (step 052IWS2205), sets the probability change flag, and shifts to the probability change state (high probability state) (step 052IWS2206).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (step 052IWS2207). Whether or not it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 052IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the special figure time reduction flag and shifts to the KT state (step 052IWS2208). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2215. In the case of a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the high base flag is not set. Therefore, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, a high probability / low base state (high). It will be controlled by probability / second KT state).

If it is neither a 10R probability variation jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 052IWS2209). Whether or not the 6R probability variation jackpot is achieved can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 052IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 052IWS2210), and further sets the special time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 052IWS2211). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2215. Therefore, in the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot, if the gaming ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, it will be controlled to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

In the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot, the high base number counter is not set only by setting the high base flag. In this case, since the high base count counter is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (see step 052IWS2502 of the gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base count counter remains 0. Therefore, after the end of the big hit game based on the 6R probability variation big hit, it is controlled to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the value of the high base number counter is 0 in the subsequent fluctuation display. It is determined as Y in step 052IWS69A of the first special symbol normal processing and step 052IWS69B of the second special symbol normal processing, and the subtraction processing of the high base number counter of step 052IWS70A and step 052IWS70B is not performed. Then, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

If it is not a 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot), the CPU 103 sets a high base flag and shifts to a high base state (step 052IWS2212), and sets a special time saving flag. To the KT state (step 052IWS2213). Further, the CPU 103 sets “50” in the high base number counter (step 052IWS2214). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2215. Therefore, in the case of a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot, it is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 052IWS2215).

(Small hit end processing)
FIG. 10-28 is a flowchart showing a small hit end process (step S128) in the accessory control process process. In the small hit end process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step 052IWS2300), and if the small hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2302. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 displays on the small hit end display timer the time corresponding to the time when the small hit end display is performed in the image display device 5 (small hit end display time). A value corresponding to the time is set (step 052IWS2301), and the process ends.

In step 052IWS2302, the value of the small hit end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 052IWS2302). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 052IWS2303). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS2303), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special time reduction flag is set (step 052IWS2304). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the right-handed display 26 is lit (step 052IWS2305). If the right-handed display 26 is lit, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2306), and also transmits a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed (step 052IWS2307).

In this example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the non-KT state, the right-handed display 26 starts lighting at the start of the small hit game (steps 052IWS2023B to S2025B). (See), the processing of steps 052IWS2304 to S2307 is executed, so that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 ends at the end of the small hit game.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 052IWS2308).

(Transition of game state)
Here, the transition of the gaming state in the feature unit 052IW will be described. FIG. 10-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to transition the gaming state in the feature unit 052IW. First, in this feature unit 052IW, in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player performs a game ball launch operation (left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a low probability / low base state, a 10R probability variable big hit, a 6R probability variable big hit, or a 6R normal big hit mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / low base state, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game is completed. It shifts to the low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, a high probability / high base state (high probability / high probability /) after the end of the jackpot game. The first KT state) is entered, and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs in a low probability / low base state, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game, and whether the next jackpot occurs. The low probability / high base state is maintained until the 50th variation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

After shifting to the KT state (high probability / high base state, low probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), in this feature portion 052IW, the player aims at the right side of the game area. And perform the firing operation (right-handed) of the game ball. Therefore, in the KT state, the start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the KT state, a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, a 2R probability variable jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the end of the big hit game, the game shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. / The high base state (high probability / first KT state) is entered, and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In this feature unit 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 6R probability variation jackpot is 50% in total (see FIG. 10-5), so that the probability is once high / high. In the base state, the high probability / high base state loops at a rate of 50%. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50th variation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the end of the big hit game, the game shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability after the jackpot game ends. / The high base state (high probability / first KT state) is entered, and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50th variation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214). In this feature unit 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 2R normal jackpot is 35% (see FIGS. 10-5 (D) and (E)). Once the low probability / high base state is reached, the low probability / high base state loops at a rate of 35%. In addition, when the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed without the next big hit after the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit occurs and the low probability / high base state is reached, FIG. 10-29 shows. As shown, it shifts to a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (see steps 052IWS69A to S73A, S69B to S73B).

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the end of the big hit game, the game shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In this feature unit 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot is 15 when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Since it is% (see FIGS. 10-5 (D) and (E)), once the high probability / low base state is reached, the high probability / low base state loops at a rate of 15%. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. / The high base state (high probability / first KT state) is entered, and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50th variation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

In addition, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is described, but the variation of the second special symbol is performed at a low rate. It is possible that the display will be performed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, it shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). become. Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

(Ordinary symbol process processing)
Next, a normal symbol process process (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 10-30 is a flowchart showing an example of ordinary symbol process processing. In the normal symbol process processing, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 and the gate switch 21 is turned on (step 052IWS5111), Control is performed to transmit the gate passage designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS5112). Then, the CPU 103 executes the gate switch passing process (step 052IWS5113).

In the feature unit 052IW, when the process of steps 052IWS5111 to S5113 is executed and the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, the gate passage designation command is transmitted. In this feature unit 052IW, the passing gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate and also plays a role of an operating area. Regardless of whether or not, the gate passage specification command is sent.

Then, the CPU 103 executes one of the processes shown in steps 052IWS5100 to S5104 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

In this feature unit 052IW, when the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41 is detected in step 052IWS5111, the gate switch passing process of step 052IWS5113 is executed regardless of whether or not the gate is waiting for passage. Normally, the variable display of the symbol is executed, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed only when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 when it is not in the gate passage waiting state, and the normal symbol is executed even if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the gate passing state. It may be configured not to execute the variable display of.

Further, in this feature unit 052IW, the passing gate 41 is used as a gate for both the normal start area and the operating area, but the special symbol process process (see steps S25A and S25B) is normally performed in the timer interrupt process. Since it is executed before the symbol process process (see step S26), the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 41 as the normal starting area is performed after the detection process of the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 41 as the operating region is performed. Detection processing is performed. Therefore, the process for starting the big hit game can be executed quickly.

Gate switch passage processing (step 052IWS5113): In the CPU 103, the count value (gate passage storage number) of the gate passage storage counter (counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41) is the maximum value (in this example, "gate passage storage number". 4 ”) is confirmed. If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by +1. The LED of the normal figure hold indicator 25C is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 103 performs a process of extracting the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol hit and storing it in the storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of stored gates.

Normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100): When the CPU 103 is in a state where the fluctuation of the normal symbol can be started (for example, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating step 052IWS5100, specifically, the normal symbol In the case where the display 20 does not display the fluctuation of the normal symbol and the variable winning ball device 6B based on the fact that the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20 is not being opened / closed, the gate passage memory is stored. Check the value of the number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory counter is confirmed. If the number of stored gates is not 0, it is determined whether or not to make a hit (whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol). Then, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "1") indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 052IWS5101).

Normal symbol variation processing (step 052IWS5101): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time in the normal symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "2") indicating the normal symbol stop processing (step 052IWS5102).

Normal symbol stop processing (step 052IWS5102): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if it is a missing symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "0") indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the time before opening the normal electric accessory is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "3") indicating the normal electric accessory opening preprocessing (step 052IWS5103).

Pre-processing for opening the normal electric accessory (step 052IWS5103): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal electric accessory operation time in the normal symbol process timer and sets the timer. Is started, and the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "4") indicating the normal electric accessory operation process (step 052IWS5104).

Ordinary electric accessory operation process (step 052IWS5104): The CPU 103 measures the ordinary symbol process timer, and when the ordinary symbol process timer times out, the variable winning ball device 6B is closed. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "0") indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100).

(Normal pattern normal processing)
FIG. 10-31 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol normal process (step 052IWS5100). In the normal symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gate passing memory number is 0 by checking the count value of the gate passing storage number counter (step 052IWS5121). If the number of gate passage memories is 0 (Y in step 052IWS5121), the process ends as it is. If the gate-passing storage number is not 0 (N in step 052IWS5121), the CPU 103 reads out the normal symbol hit determination random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate-passing storage number = 1 (step 052IWS5122). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the gate passage storage counter by 1, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 052IWS5123). That is, the random value for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing storage number = n-1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random symbols for normal symbol hit determination stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the number of gate-passing storages are always extracted is the order of the number of gate-passing storages = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It is designed to match.

Next, the CPU 103 uses a normal symbol determination table for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol, and performs a lottery process based on a random number (random number value for determining whether to hit a normal symbol) to determine whether or not to hit a normal symbol. (Step 052IWS5127). In this feature unit 052IW, in step 052IWS5127, the CPU 103 is uniformly 99/100 regardless of whether it is in the probabilistic state, the KT state, or the high base state. It is decided to make it a normal symbol with a probability.

In step 052IWS5127, when the read normal symbol hit determination random value is within the hit range (when it is a hit), the CPU 103 sets the hit symbol as a display result (step 052IWS5128), and proceeds to step 052IWS5130. Further, in step 052IWS5127, when the read normal symbol hit determination random value is not within the hit range (when it is out of the range), the CPU 103 sets the outlier symbol as the display result (step 052IWS5129), and proceeds to step 052IWS5130.

In step 052IWS5130, if the high base flag is set, the CPU 103 sets 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol fluctuation time in the normal symbol process timer (Y, S5131 in step 052IWS5130). If the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 second as the normal symbol fluctuation time is set in the normal symbol process timer (N, S5132 in step 052IWS5130).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 052IWS5101) (step 052IWS5133).

(Normal symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-32 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol stop process (step 052IWS5102). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process timer to -1 (step 052IWS3701). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 052IWS3702). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 052IWS3702), the process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS3702), the CPU 103 determines whether the normal symbol stop symbol is a winning symbol (in step 052IWS5127). (Whether or not it was determined) is confirmed (step 052IWS3703). Whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol is confirmed by, for example, setting the normal symbol hit determination flag when it is determined to be a hit in step 052IWS5127, and checking whether or not the flag is set. Can be done.

When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a hit symbol but a missed symbol (N in step 052IWS3703), the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value indicating normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100) (step 052IWS5100). Specifically, it is updated to "0") (step 052IWS3708).

In step 052IWS3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (Y in step 052IWS3703), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 052IWS3704), and if it is set, it is set. That is, in the case of the first KT state, 0.1 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step 052IWS3706). If the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step 052IWS3705). ..

Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “3”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory opening preprocessing (step 052IWS5103) (step 052IWS3707).

(Ordinary electric accessory pre-opening treatment)
FIG. 10-33 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory opening pretreatment (step 052IWS5103). In the normal electric accessory opening preprocessing, the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process timer to -1 (step 052IWS3801). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 052IWS3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 052IWS3802), the process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the time before opening the normal electric accessory has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS3802), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 052IWS3803). , That is, in the first KT state, 5.5 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the normal symbol process timer (step 052IWS3805). When the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 052IWS3804).

As described above, in the feature unit 052IW, 5.5 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the first KT state, and 0.2 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the normal state or the second KT state. By doing so, the first KT state is in a state in which it is easier to win a start prize in the second start winning opening than in the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, the first KT state is configured so that the game ball is less likely to reach the special variable winning ball device 17 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B than in the normal state or the second KT state.

It should be noted that the control method for facilitating the start winning prize in the second starting winning opening when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to that shown in the feature unit 052IW. For example, in the case of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened many times as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state (for example, the variable winning ball device in the normal state or the second KT state). It may be controlled so that the number of times of opening of 6B is set to 1 time, whereas the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is set to 2 times in the first KT state). By doing so, in the case of the first KT state, by increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B is opened, it is possible to facilitate the starting winning in the second starting winning opening.

Further, for example, in the case of the first KT state, the control for lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B shown above as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state, and the variable winning ball device 6B It may be executed in combination with a control that increases the number of times of opening.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B to the open state (step 052IWS3806). Specifically, the solenoid 81 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 6B.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “4”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory operation process (step 052IWS5104) (step 052IWS3807).

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 10-34 to 10-37 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 052IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 052IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 052IWS613). The reason for +2 is to read 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 052IWS614), the effect control CPU 0120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step). 052IWS615).

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 052IWS616), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS617). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 052IWS618).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step 052IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS620). ).

If the received effect control command is one of the symbol confirmation specification commands (first symbol confirmation specification command, second symbol confirmation specification command, first compulsory symbol confirmation specification command, second compulsory symbol confirmation specification command) (step 052IWS621). ), The effect control CPU 120 sets the confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 052IWS622). For example, when the first symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation designation command is received, the second confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first compulsory confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received, the second compulsory confirmation command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 052IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start displaying the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 052IWS624). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 052IWS625).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 052IWS626), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the display of the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 052IWS627). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 052IWS628).

In this example, by executing the process of steps 052IWS624 and S627, the right-handed display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the big hit game.

In addition, for example, by changing the display mode (for example, the display color) of the right-handed display displayed during the big hit game, the setting value suggestion effect suggesting the current set value may be executed. For example, when the right-handed display is started in step 052IWS624, the right-handed display of the white display color is normally started, but when it is decided to execute the set value suggestion effect, the set value "1" is set. If is, the right-handed display of the blue display color is started at a relatively high rate, and if the setting value is "2", the right-handed display of the green display color is started at a relatively high rate. , When the setting value is "3", the right-handed display of the yellow display color is started at a relatively high rate, and when the setting value is "4", the right of the orange display color is relatively high. When the setting value is "5", the right-handed display of the red display color is started at a relatively high rate, and when the setting value is "6", the right-handed display is started at a relatively high rate. Right-handed display of the rainbow-colored display color may be started.

Further, for example, it is configured to continuously execute the right-handed display even during the KT state after the big hit game ends, and the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display is changed at the timing of the end of the big hit game. It may be configured to perform a value suggestion effect.

Further, for example, the left-handed display is configured to start when the variable display of 50 times is ended in the low-probability / first KT state and the normal state (low-probability / low-base state) is entered, and the left-handed display is started. The display mode (for example, the display color) of the display may be changed to execute the set value suggestion effect. When the control of the gaming state is switched in such a form, the set value suggestion effect may be configured to be executable.

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step 052IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step 052IWS630).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step 052IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag (step 052IWS632).

If the received effect control command is a display command during the opening of the big winning opening (step 052IWS633), the effect control CPU 120 is the number of winnings for counting the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening during the round of the big hit game. The value of the counter is reset (cleared to 0) (step 052IWS634). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a big winning opening opening flag that specifies that the big winning opening is being opened (a round period during the big hit game) (step 052IWS635).

In this example, by executing the process of step 052IWS634, the value of the winning number counter is cleared to 0 at the timing of receiving the large winning opening opening display command (timing to start the round), which is extremely rare. Even if an over-winning is detected during the interval period after the end of the round period, the value is counted in the winning number counter.

If the received effect control command is a display command after opening the large winning opening (step 052IWS636), the effect control CPU 120 sets a flag after opening the large winning opening that specifies that it is an interval period after opening the large winning opening. (Step 052IWS637).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting start designation command (step 052IWS638), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start lighting the right-handed lighting notification LED 37 (step 052IWS639).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting end designation command (step 052IWS640), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed notification LED 37 (step 052IWS641).

If the received effect control command is a low accuracy / non-KT background designation command (step 052IWS642), the effect control CPU 120 displays the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the low probability / non-KT state (for example,). Control to display in the blue background image) (step 052IWS643). If the effect control CPU 120 is set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the first KT state flag indicating that it is in the first KT state (step 052IWS644). Further, the effect control CPU 120 is a prize for counting the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning the big prize opening and the special winning opening during the big hit game and the high probability / second KT state. If the ball number counter is set, the value of the prize ball number counter is reset (cleared to 0) (step 052IWS645).

In this example, a game ball wins a prize in the big prize opening during a big hit game (except during a big hit game based on a 2R probability variable big hit or a 2R normal big hit), or a game is played in a special winning opening during a high probability / second KT state. When a ball wins a prize, the value of the prize ball counter is cumulatively updated (see step 052IWS660, S667), but the processing of step 052IWS645 is executed, so that the gaming state has a low probability / The value of the prize ball counter is cleared to 0 when the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed after the high base state (low probability / first KT state) is reached and the low probability / low base state is reached.

If the received effect control command is a low accuracy / first KT background designation command (step 052IWS646), the effect control CPU 120 displays the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the low probability / first KT state (for example,). Control to display in the green background image) (step 052IWS647). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first KT state flag (step 052IWS648), and if it is set, the high probability state flag indicating that the state is in the high probability state and the second KT state indicating that the state is in the second KT state. Reset the 2KT status flag (step 052IWS649).

If the received effect control command is a high-accuracy / first KT background designation command (step 052IWS650), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the high probability / first KT state (for example,). Control to display in the yellow background image) (step 052IWS651). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 052IWS652), and resets the second KT state flag if set (step 052IWS653).

If the received effect control command is a high-accuracy / second KT background designation command (step 052IWS654), the effect control CPU 120 displays the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the high probability / second KT state (for example,). Control to display the image (red background image) (step 052IWS655). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 052IWS656), and resets the first KT state flag if set (step 052IWS657).

If the received effect control command is a big prize opening prize designation command (step 052IWS658), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a big hit game based on a 10R probability variable big hit, a 6R probability variable big hit, or a 6R normal big hit is in progress. (Step 052IWS659). Whether or not a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a jackpot game based on a 6R normal jackpot is in progress is determined by, for example, whether the value of the effect control process flag is during the jackpot effect process (step S176) to the ending effect process (step S177). ), And also check whether the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area is the display result 2 specified command to the display result 4 specified command. It can be determined by this.

During a big hit game based on a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 adds 15 to the value of the prize ball counter (step 052IWS660). Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition (step 052IWS661). The prize ball number display is a display of the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning a prize in the big prize opening and the special winning opening during the big hit game and the high probability / second KT state.

By executing the processes of steps 052IWS658 to S661, in this example, the prize ball is based on the fact that a prize is generated in the big winning opening during the big hit game based on the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, or the 6R normal jackpot. The value of the number counter and the number of prize balls display are updated. On the other hand, even during the big hit game, if a prize is won in the big prize opening during the big hit game based on the 2R probability variable big hit or the 2R normal big hit, the value of the prize ball counter is not updated and the prize ball. The number display is also not updated.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes an over-winning suggestion effect process for determining and executing the over-winning suggestion effect (step 052IWS662). It should be noted that the "over-winning suggestion effect" is an effect that is executed at the timing when the over-winning to the large winning opening occurs and suggests the currently set value.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize ball number display suggestion effect process for determining and executing the prize ball number display suggestion effect (step 052IWS663). In addition, in the "Prize ball number display suggestion effect", the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning a prize in the big prize opening or the special winning opening during the big hit game or the high probability / second KT state is predetermined. It is executed at the timing when the number (in this example, 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, 2666) is reached, and is an effect suggesting the currently set value.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize ball number emphasizing effect process for determining and executing the prize ball number emphasizing effect (step 052IWS664). In addition, in the "Prize ball number emphasis production", the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning a prize in the big prize opening or the special winning opening during the big hit game or the high probability / second KT state is a predetermined number. (In this example, 1000 pieces, 2000 pieces, 3000 pieces, 4000 pieces, 5000 pieces) are highlighted.

If the received effect control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 052IWS665), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS666). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, during the high probability / second KT state), the effect control CPU 120 adds 10 to the value of the prize ball counter (step 052IWS667). Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition (step 052IWS668).

By executing the process of steps 052IWS665-S668, in this example, the value of the prize ball counter and the prize ball are based on the fact that a small hit occurs during the high probability / second KT state and a prize is generated in the special winning opening. The number display is updated. On the other hand, even in the KT state, if a special prize is won during the high probability / first KT state or the low probability / first KT state, the value of the prize ball counter is not updated. The prize ball number display is also not updated (however, only the value of the prize ball counter is not updated, and the value of the prize ball counter is not reset).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the small hit winning suggestion effect process for determining and executing the small hit winning suggestion effect (step 052IWS669). It should be noted that the "small hit winning suggestion effect" is an effect that is executed at the timing when a small hit occurs during the high probability / second KT state and a prize is awarded to the special winning opening, and suggests the currently set value. ..

Next, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 052IWS663 and executes the prize ball number display suggestion effect process (step 052IWS663). Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize ball number emphasis effect process (step 052IWS664).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 executes a process of storing the received effect control command and setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 052IWS670). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS611.

(Suggestion production processing at the time of over winning)
FIG. 10-38 is a flowchart showing a suggestion effect processing (step 052IWS662) at the time of over winning. In the over-winning suggestion effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first adds 1 to the value of the winning number counter (step 052IWS301). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the winning number counter after addition is 11 or more (step 052IWS302). If the value of the winning number counter is 11 or more (that is, if an over-winning to the large winning opening has occurred), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence and type of the over-winning suggestion effect. A lottery process based on a random number is performed using the over-winning suggestion effect determination table, and the presence / absence and type of the over-winning suggestion effect are determined (step 052IWS303).

FIG. 10-39 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the suggestion effect determination table at the time of over winning. As shown in FIGS. 10-39, in the over-winning suggestion effect determination table, there is no over-winning suggestion effect, over-winning suggestion effect A, over-winning suggestion effect B, over-winning suggestion effect C, and over-winning. Judgment values are assigned to the suggestion effect D, the suggestion effect E at the time of over winning, and the suggestion effect F at the time of over winning.

As shown in FIGS. 10-39, in this example, when the game ball wins in the large winning opening, the winning display (in this example, “+15”) is displayed in the normal display color (white in this example) on the image display device 5. (Character display) is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-39, when the "over-winning suggestion effect A" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the blue display color on the image display device 5, and the speaker 8L is displayed. , 8R outputs a winning sound of sound A different from the normal sound. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect B" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the green display color on the image display device 5, and the sound B different from the normal sound is won from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect C" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the yellow display color on the image display device 5, and the sound C different from the normal sound is won from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect D" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the orange display color on the image display device 5, and the sound D different from the normal sound is won from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect E" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the red display color on the image display device 5, and the sound E different from the normal sound is won from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect F" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the rainbow-colored display color on the image display device 5, and the sound F different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output.

As shown in FIGS. 10-39, different determination values are assigned to the over-winning suggestion effect determination table depending on which of the set values "1" to "6" the current set value is. In step 052IWS303, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615) and specifies the current set value. Then, the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect at the time of over winning is determined based on the determination value corresponding to the specified set value.

As shown in FIGS. 10-39, in this example, when the set value is “1”, the ratio at which the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect A is determined is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "2", the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect B is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "3", the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect C is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "4", the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect D is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "5", the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect E is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "6", the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect F is relatively high.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-39, in this example, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect, which is the sum of the over-winning suggestion effects A to F, is 10% + 8% + 7% + 5% + 5% + 5% = 40%, 45% when the set value is "2", 50% when the set value is "3", and the set value. When it is "4", it is 55%, when it is the set value "5", it is 60%, and when it is the set value "6", it is 65%. As described above, in this example, since the over-winning occurs relatively rarely, the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect is relatively high as compared with the small hit-winning suggestion effect described later. There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect is determined in step 052IWS303 (step 052IWS304). If it is determined to execute the over-winning suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the winning display according to the type of the determined over-winning suggestion effect (step 052IWS305). .. For example, if it is determined to execute the suggestion effect A at the time of over winning, the image display device 5 controls to display the winning display in the blue display color. Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to output a winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the type of the determined over-winning suggestion effect (step 052IWS306). For example, if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect A at the time of over winning, the control is performed to output the winning sound of the sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, when the value of the winning number counter is 10 or less (N in step 052IWS302), or when it is determined that there is no suggestion effect at the time of over winning (N in step 052IWS304), the effect control CPU 120 is the image display device 5. In, control is performed to display the winning display in a normal display color (white in this example) (step 052IWS307). Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to output the winning sound of the normal sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 052IWS308).

(Suggestion production processing at the time of small hit prize)
FIG. 10-40 is a flowchart showing a suggestion effect processing (step 052IWS669) at the time of a small hit winning. In the small hit winning suggestion effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence / absence and type of the small hit winning suggestion effect. This is performed, and the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect at the time of winning a small hit is determined (step 052IWS321).

FIG. 10-41 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the suggestion effect determination table at the time of small hit winning. As shown in FIGS. 10-41, in the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table, there is no small hit winning suggestion effect, small hit winning suggestion effect A, small hit winning suggestion effect B, and small hit winning suggestion effect. Judgment values are assigned to C, the suggestion effect D at the time of winning a small hit, the suggestion effect E at the time of winning a small hit, and the suggestion effect F at the time of winning a small hit.

As shown in FIGS. 10-41, in this example, when the game ball wins in the special winning opening, the winning display (in this example, "+10") is displayed in the normal display color (white in this example) on the image display device 5. (Character display) is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-41, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect A" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the blue display color on the image display device 5, and the speaker is displayed. A winning sound of sound A different from the normal sound is output from 8L and 8R. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect B" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the green display color on the image display device 5, and the sound B different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect C" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the yellow display color on the image display device 5, and the sound C different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect D" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the orange display color on the image display device 5, and the sound D different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect E" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the red display color on the image display device 5, and the sound E different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect F" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the rainbow-colored display color on the image display device 5, and the sound F different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound of is output.

As shown in FIGS. 10-41, different determination values are assigned to the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table depending on whether the current set value is the set value "1" to "6". .. In step 052IWS321, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615) and specifies the current set value. Then, the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect at the time of winning a small hit is determined based on the determination value corresponding to the specified set value.

As shown in FIGS. 10-41, in this example, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect A is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "2", the ratio of determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect B is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "3", the ratio of determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect C is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "4", the ratio of determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect D is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "5", the ratio of determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect E is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "6", the ratio of determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect F is relatively high.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-41, in this example, when the set value is "1", the ratio for determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect, which is the sum of the small hit winning suggestion effects A to F. Is 2% + 1% + 1% + 1% = 5%, 6% when the set value is "2", 7% when the set value is "3", and the set value "4". When it is, it is 8%, when it is the set value "5", it is 9%, and when it is the set value "6", it is 10%. As described above, in this example, the ratio of determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect is relatively low as compared with the over-winning suggestion effect already described.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect is determined in step 052IWS321 (step 052IWS322). If the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the winning display according to the type of the determined small hit winning suggested effect (step). 052IWS323). For example, if it is determined to execute the small hit winning suggestion effect A, the image display device 5 controls to display the winning display in the blue display color. Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to output a winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the type of the determined small hit winning suggestion effect (step 052IWS324). For example, if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect A at the time of a small hit winning, the control is performed to output the winning sound of the sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no suggestion effect at the time of small hit winning (N in step 052IWS322), the effect control CPU 120 displays the winning display in the normal display color (white in this example) in the image display device 5. (Step 052IWS325). Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to output the winning sound of the normal sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 052IWS326).

It should be noted that the reliability of the set value suggestion may be different depending on whether the suggestion effect at the time of over winning is executed or the suggestion effect at the time of small hit winning is executed. For example, the over-winning suggestion effect F can be executed at any of the set values "1" to "6", but is executed at a relatively high rate when the set value is "6", whereas the small hit is executed. If the suggestion effect F at the time of winning is executed, the set value "6" may be determined. On the contrary, for example, the small hit winning suggestion effect F can be executed by any of the set values "1" to "6", but is executed at a relatively high rate when the set value is "6". On the other hand, if the suggestion effect F at the time of over winning is executed, the set value "6" may be determined.

Further, in this example, the over-winning suggestion effect and the small hit-winning suggestion effect make the display mode of the winning display (display color in this example) different from the usual one, and output a winning sound different from the usual one. The case where it is carried out by an embodiment is shown, but it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, by setting only one of the winning display display mode (display color in this example) and the winning sound to be different from the normal mode, the over-winning suggestion effect and the small hit-winning suggestion effect are executed. It may be configured as follows. In addition, for example, by displaying the effect display at the timing of the occurrence of over-winning or the occurrence of winning in the special winning opening, or by changing the display color of the lamp or LED, a suggestion effect at the time of over-winning or a small hit winning is achieved. It may be configured to perform a time suggestion effect.

(Prize ball number display suggestion production processing)
FIG. 10-42 is a flowchart showing the prize ball number display suggestion effect processing (step 052IWS663). In the prize ball number display suggestion effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 456 first (step 052IWS341). In this example, if a game ball wins in the big prize opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added by 15. Therefore, in step 052IWS341, the effect is controlled. If the value of the prize ball counter is 465, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 456 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 456 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "4" or more (step 052IWS342). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "4" or more can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "4" or more, the effect control CPU 120 uses a prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect, and draws a lot based on random numbers. Processing is performed to determine the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect A (step 052IWS343). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

FIG. 10-43 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed, a character display such as "456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is set. It is suggested that the set value is "4" or more. As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is determined with a probability of 3%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed only when the set value is the set value "4" or more. Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed, at least the set value "4" is executed. It will be confirmed that it is more than that.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 456 first (N in step 052IWS341), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 555 first (N). Step 052IWS344). In this example, if a game ball wins in the big prize opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added by 15. Therefore, in step 052IWS344, the effect is controlled. If the value of the prize ball counter is 555, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 555 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 555 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "5" or more (step 052IWS345). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "5" or more can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "5" or more, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table, and has or does not have the prize ball number display suggestion effect B. (Step 052IWS346). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed, a character display such as "555 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is set. It is suggested that the set value is "5" or more. As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is determined with a probability of 2%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed only when the set value is the set value "5" or more. Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed, at least the set value "5" is executed. It will be confirmed that it is more than that.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 555 first (N in step 052IWS344), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 666 first (N). Step 052IWS347). In this example, if a game ball wins in the big prize opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added by 15. Therefore, in step 052IWS347, the effect is controlled. If the value of the prize ball counter is 675, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 666 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 666 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "6" (step 052IWS348). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "6" can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "6", the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table, and determines the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect C. Determine (step 052IWS349). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed, a character display such as "666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is set. It is suggested that the set value is "6". As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is determined with a probability of 1%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed only when the set value is the set value "6". Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed, the set value "6" is used. It will be confirmed that there is.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 666 first (N in step 052IWS347), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2456 first (N). Step 052IWS350). In this example, 15 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the big winning opening during the big hit game, and 10 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the special winning opening during the high probability / second KT state. Is obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is added by 15 or 10. Therefore, in step 052IWS350, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the prize ball number counter value is 2460 or 2465. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2456 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2456 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "4" or more (step 052IWS351). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "4" or more can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "4" or more, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table, and has or does not have the prize ball number display suggestion effect D. (Step 052IWS352). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed, a character display such as "2456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is set. It is suggested that the set value is "4" or more. As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is determined with a probability of 5%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed only when the set value is the set value "4" or more. Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed, the set value "4" is executed. It will be confirmed that the above is the case.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2456 first (N in step 052IWS350), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2555 first (N). Step 052IWS353). In this example, 15 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the big winning opening during the big hit game, and 10 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the special winning opening during the high probability / second KT state. Is obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is incremented by 15 or 10. Therefore, in step 052IWS353, the effect control CPU 120 determines the prize ball if the value of the prize ball counter is 2555 or 2560. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2555 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2555 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "5" or more (step 052IWS354). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "5" or more can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "5" or more, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table, and has or does not have the prize ball number display suggestion effect E. (Step 052IWS355). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed, a character display such as "2555 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is set. It is suggested that the set value is "5" or more. As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is determined with a probability of 3%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed only when the set value is the set value "5" or more. Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed, the set value "5" is executed. It will be confirmed that the above is the case.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2555 first (N in step 052IWS353), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2666 first (N). Step 052IWS356). In this example, 15 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the big winning opening during the big hit game, and 10 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the special winning opening during the high probability / second KT state. Is obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is incremented by 15 or 10. Therefore, in step 052IWS356, the effect control CPU 120 determines the prize ball if the value of the prize ball counter is 2670 or 2675. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2666 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2666 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "6" (step 052IWS357). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "6" can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "6", the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table, and determines the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect F. Determine (step 052IWS358). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed, a character display such as "2666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is set. It is suggested that the set value is "6". As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is determined with a probability of 2%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed only when the set value is the set value "6". Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed, the set value "6" is used. It will be confirmed that there is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect is determined in step 052IWS343, S346, S349, S352, S355, S358 (step 052IWS359). If the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to execute the determined type of prize ball number display suggestion effect (step 052IWS360). For example, if it is determined to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect A, the image display device 5 controls to display a character display such as "456 OVER".

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-43, when viewed from the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to C executed during the big hit game, the period during the big hit game becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggestion effect decreases to 3%, 2%, and 1%, while the set value "4" or more is confirmed, the set value "5" or more is confirmed, and the set value " 6 ”The accuracy of confirmation and suggestion of set values is increasing. Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-43, when viewed from the prize ball number display suggestion effects D to F executed during the period during the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH), the small hit RUSH is in progress. As the period of the prize balls increases and the number of prize balls increases, the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggestion effect decreases to 5%, 3%, and 2%, while the set value "4" or more is confirmed and the set value. The accuracy of confirming "5" or more, confirming the set value "6", and suggesting the set value is increasing.

Not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, as the period during the big hit game or the period during the small hit RUSH increases and the number of prize balls increases, the probability of executing the prize ball number display suggestion effect increases. It may be configured to go. Further, for example, as the period during the big hit game or the period during the small hit RUSH becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases, the accuracy of suggesting the set value may decrease.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-43, the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to C executed during the big hit game and the prize ball number display suggestion executed during the small hit RUSH period. Although the case where the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggestion effect is different between the effects D to F is shown, the prize ball number display suggestion effect is configured to be executed with the same execution probability regardless of such an embodiment. You may.

(Prize ball number emphasis production processing)
FIG. 10-44 is a flowchart showing the prize ball number emphasizing effect processing (step 052IWS664). In the prize ball number emphasis effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter first reaches the threshold value for each 1000 (1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000 in this example). (Step 052IWS371). In this example, if a game ball wins in the big prize opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added by 15. Therefore, in step 052IWS371, the effect is controlled. For example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 1000 or 1005, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 1000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 2000 or 2005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 3000 or 3005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 3000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 4000 or 4005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 4000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 5000 or 5005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 5000 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches the threshold value for every 1000 first, the effect control CPU 120 uses a prize ball number emphasis effect determination table for determining the presence or absence of the prize ball number emphasis effect, and is a random number. A lottery process is performed based on the above, and it is determined whether or not the prize ball number emphasizing effect is present (step 052IWS372).

FIG. 10-45 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the prize ball number emphasizing effect determination table. As shown in FIGS. 10-45, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 1000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect A is determined with a probability of 50%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect A is executed, a character display such as "1000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect B is determined with a probability of 60%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect B is executed, a character display such as "2000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 3000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect C is determined with a probability of 70%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect C is executed, a character display such as "3000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 4000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect D is determined with a probability of 80%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect D is executed, a character display such as "4000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 5000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect E is determined with a probability of 90%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect E is executed, a character display such as "5000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect is determined in step 052IWS372 (step 052IWS373). If the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to execute the determined type of prize ball number emphasizing effect (step 052IWS374). For example, if it is decided to execute the prize ball number emphasizing effect A, the image display device 5 controls to display a character display such as "1000 OVER".

In this example, when the number of prize balls reaches 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, and 5000, the prize ball number emphasizing effect can be executed. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, not only when the prize ball number emphasis effect can be executed in all of these cases, the prize ball number emphasis effect can be executed when the number of prize balls reaches 1000, 2000, and 3000. It may be configured. Further, for example, even when the number of prize balls reaches 6000 or 7000, the prize ball number emphasizing effect may be configured to be executable, and various aspects can be considered.

As shown in FIGS. 10-44 and 10-45, the prize ball number emphasizing effect is different from the prize ball number display suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 10-42 and 10-43, and is irrelevant to the current set value. It is a production that is decided and executed. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, by changing the display mode of the prize ball number emphasizing effect, the prize ball number emphasizing effect may be configured to be feasible in a mode suggesting the current set value. For example, the current set value may be suggested by displaying a character display such as "1000 OVER" or "2000 OVER" in a display color different from the usual one.

(Variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 10-46 is a flowchart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command has been received (step 052IWS811). Whether or not the variation pattern command is received is determined by, for example, setting a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that the variation pattern command has been received when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis process (step S75). In step 052IWS811, it may be confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set.

If the variation pattern command is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS812). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 executes the variation display of the first special symbol. Is confirmed (step 052IWS813). Whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the first variation patterns # 01 to # 09. It can be determined by confirming whether or not. Unless it is the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (that is, the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol), the process is terminated as it is. When executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 052IWS815).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is the KT state), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol. (Step 052IWS814). Whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the second variation patterns # 01 to # 34. It can be determined by confirming whether or not. Unless it is the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol (that is, the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol), the process is terminated as it is. When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 052IWS815).

By executing the process of steps 052IWS812-S815, in the feature unit 052IW, in the non-KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the first special symbol. When it is executed and it is in the KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. In other words, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is in the KT state, or even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, it is in the non-KT state. , The variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 10-47 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is executed (step 052IWS920). Whether or not to execute the variation display of the first special symbol is determined by, for example, the variation pattern command stored in the variation pattern command storage area designating the first variation patterns # 01 to # 09. It can be determined by confirming whether or not it exists. When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation display this time is a small hit (step 052IWS921). Whether or not the variation display this time is a small hit is checked, for example, whether or not the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area is the display result 7 designation command. It can be determined by this. If it is a small hit variation, the effect control CPU 120 determines a non-reach off symbol as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (step 052IWS922).

As described above, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, there is only a case where the small hit is A, and the game ball to the special winning opening during the small hit game. You can hardly expect to win a prize. Therefore, by executing the process of steps 052IWS920 to S922, in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, the non-reach off symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. This prevents players from having excessive expectations.

When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed (N of step 052IWS920) or when the small hit variation is not performed (N of step 052IWS921), the effect control CPU 120 is the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the variation display result. Is determined (step 052IWS923). In step 052IWS923, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the display result 1 designation command (when it is determined to be out of order), only the outlier symbol or the left and right decorative symbols in which the left middle right decorative symbols do not completely match are received. Determine the combination of matching out-of-reach symbols. Further, when the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 10R probability variation jackpot is determined), the combination of the symbols aligned with the symbol "7" among the odd-numbered symbols on the left, middle, and right is determined. Further, when the display result 3 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 6R probability variation jackpot is determined), the combination of the symbols in which the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are odd-numbered symbols other than "7" is determined. Further, when the display result 5 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 2R probability variation jackpot is determined), the combination of the symbols including the special symbol (in this example, the symbol "R") is determined. .. In addition, when a display result 4 designation command or a display result 6 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot), a combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are even-numbered. To decide. Further, when the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), the combination of the decorative symbols of the small hit symbol (for example, "135") is determined.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation display is out of order (step 052IWS924). To check whether the variation display this time is out of order, for example, check whether the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area is the display result 1 specification command. Can be determined by. If there is no deviation fluctuation, the process proceeds to step 052IWS928 as it is. If it is a deviation variation (Y in step 052IWS924), the effect control CPU 120 executes a set value suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the set value suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value. (Step 052IWS925).

In step 052IWS925, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the set value stored in the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). Then, the effect control CPU 120 uses a table corresponding to the specified set value as a set value suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence / absence and type of the set value suggestion effect, and performs a lottery process based on a random number to set. Determine the presence / absence and type of value suggestion effect.

FIG. 10-48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the set value suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIGS. 10-48, in the set value suggestion effect determination table, there is no set value suggestion effect, set value suggestion effect A, set value suggestion effect B, set value suggestion effect C, set value suggestion effect D, and set value. Judgment values are assigned to the suggestion effect E and the set value suggestion effect F, respectively.

The set value suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 10-48, the set value “1” is used. In some cases, the execution rate is the highest. Further, the set value suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a green display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 10-48, the set value “2”. The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect C is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a yellow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 10-48, the set value “3”. The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect D is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in an orange display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 10-48, the set value "4". The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect E is an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a red display color on the image display device 5, for example, and as shown in FIGS. 10-48, the set value “5”. The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect F is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a rainbow-colored display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 10-48, the set value “ When it is "6", the execution rate is the highest.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS926). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not the second KT state), the process proceeds to step 052IWS928 as it is. If the second KT state flag is set (Y in step 052IWS926), that is, in the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) continues. A small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the continuation suggestion effect is executed (step 052IWS927).

FIG. 10-49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIGS. 10-49, in the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table, it is determined for each of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B. A value has been assigned. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined effect image in a blue display color on the image display device 5. Further, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined effect image in a red display color on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 10-49, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the set value is "2", the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is produced. The execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest when the setting value is "3", and the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest when the setting value is "4". Is the next highest, and when the set value is "5", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is even higher, and when the setting value is "6", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest. It's getting low.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-49, the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest when the set value is "1", and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is when the set value is "6". Execution rate is the highest.

In this example, the jackpot probability is the lowest when the set value is "1" and the jackpot probability is the highest when the set value is "6". Since the second KT state may end as an opportunity, the setting value "1" is the setting state in which the second KT state is most likely to continue (the degree of continuation expectation is high), and the setting value "6" is used. In some cases, it can be said that the second KT state is the setting state in which it is most difficult to continue (the degree of continuation expectation is low). Therefore, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the set value is "6", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the lowest. Therefore, by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, it is possible to increase the expectation that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) will continue.

As described above, the continuation expectation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is the expectation that the control period to the second KT state becomes longer without the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest. Therefore, especially when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed. It is possible to further increase the expectation that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) will continue.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the variation pattern of the decorative symbol to be used, the set value suggestion effect, and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect based on the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command. Select a process table according to the set value suggestion effect and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect (step 052IWS928).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the process table selected in step 052IWS928 to the process timer and starts the process timer (step 052IWS929). Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L, 8R) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Is executed (step 052IWS930). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a control signal (display control execution data) to the VDP in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

When it is decided to execute the set value suggestion effect, step 052IWS930 and the variable display effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the set value suggestion effect selected in step 052IWS928. The set value suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation display of the symbol (during the deviation fluctuation).

Further, when it is decided to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, step 052IWS930 and the variable display during effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect selected in step 052IWS928. As a result, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variation display of the decorative symbol (during the deviation variation in the second KT state).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time in the decoration symbol fluctuation time timer and starts the decoration symbol fluctuation time timer (step 052IWS931). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process (step S172) during variable display (step 052IWS932).

(Variable display effect processing)
FIG. 10-50 is a flowchart showing the variable display during effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 052IWS8101) and subtracts 1 from the value of the decorative symbol variation time timer (step 052IWS8102). When the process timer times out (step 052IWS8103), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 052IWS8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 052IWS8105).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS8106). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the first symbol confirmation designation command (for example, the first). 1 Confirm whether or not the confirmation command reception flag is set) (step 052IWS8107). If the first symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 052IWS8110).

If the first symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the first forced symbol confirmation designation command (for example, whether the first forced confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 052IWS8108). If the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 052IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with an outlier symbol (step 052IWS8109). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 052IWS8110).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set in step 052IWS8106 (that is, if it is in the KT state), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the second symbol confirmation designation command (for example, the first 2 Confirm whether or not the confirmation command reception flag is set) (step 052IWS8111). If the second symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 052IWS8114).

If the second symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the second forced symbol confirmation designation command (for example, whether the second forced confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 052IWS8112). If the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 052IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with an outlier symbol (step 052IWS8113). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 052IWS8114).

If the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is not received in step 052IWS8108, or the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is not received in step 052IWS8112, the effect control CPU 120 uses the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer. Checks if has timed out (step 052IWS8115). If the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 120 switches to the process data for the standby effect (step 052IWS8116). Then, the effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 052IWS8117).

In this example, as described above, when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a miss, a small hit, or a probabilistic big hit, is being executed. In the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. In addition, when the variable display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variable display of the second special symbol, which is a miss, a small hit, or a probable variable big hit, is being executed, the small hit game is in progress. , The update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. The fact that the decorative symbol variation time timer timed out in step 052IWS8115 without receiving any of the symbol confirmation designation commands means that the update of the first variation time timer or the second variation time timer is interrupted in this way, and the first This is the case where the variable display of the special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed. In this case, in this example, the process of step 052IWS8116, S8117 is executed to switch to the standby effect, and then the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is restarted, and finally one special The standby effect is continued until the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is completed. The "standby effect" is, for example, an effect in which the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right is swayed or slightly changed in the image display device 5 to be in a temporary stop state.

In the image display device 5, for example, when the variable display of the system small symbol, the fourth symbol, or the like is also executed, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the first special When the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed, the variable display of these system small symbols or the fourth symbol is also continuously executed. Then, when the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is restarted and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finally stopped and displayed, these system small symbols and the fourth symbol are displayed. The fluctuation display is also stopped and displayed.

(Waiting processing per special figure)
10-51 and 10-52 are flowcharts showing a special figure hit waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process. In the special symbol hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 052IWS9701). .. If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step 052IWS9706. When the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the feature unit 052IW, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step 052IWS9705. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the jackpot effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the jackpot middle effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 052IWS9703 is performed. The process proceeds to step 052IWS9706 without execution.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set. (Step 052IWS9702). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step 052IWS9717. In the feature unit 052IW, when the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step 052IWS9716. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the small hit medium effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the small hit medium effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 052IWS9703 is displayed. The process proceeds to step 052IWS9717 without executing the process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 120 uses the stop symbol (missing symbol, jackpot symbol) of the left middle right decorative symbol being stopped displayed in the image display device 5. , Small hit symbol) is controlled to be confirmed and displayed (step 052IWS9703). When the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command or the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received and the process of replacing with the misaligned symbol is executed in steps 052IWS8109 and S8113, the effect control CPU 120 is deviated from the symbol in step 052IWS9703. Is controlled to be confirmed and displayed.

When the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (Y in step 052IWS9704), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 052IWS9705).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received (step 052IWS9706). When the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 052IWS9707).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the prize ball number display is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS9708). If the prize ball number display is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot type of the jackpot generated this time is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot (step 052IWS9709). Whether or not the jackpot type is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot is determined by, for example, whether or not the received display result specification command is a display result 2 designation command to a display result 4 designation command. It can be determined by checking. If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the prize ball number display (step 052IWS9710).

By executing the processes of steps 052IWS9708 to S9710, in this example, the display of the number of prize balls is started when the jackpot game based on the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, or the 6R normal jackpot is started. On the other hand, even if it is a big hit, the display of the number of prize balls is not started when the big hit game based on the 2R probability variable big hit or the 2R normal big hit is started.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the effect during the big hit (step 052IWS9711). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 052IWS9712), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) is executed (step 052IWS9713).

After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot middle effect process (step S176) (step 052IWS9714).

If the big hit symbol is not confirmed and displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (N in step 052IWS9704), and if the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (Y in step 052IWS9715), the effect control CPU 120 is stopped. Set the symbol display flag 2 (step 052IWS9716).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 052IWS9717). When the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 052IWS9718).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the small hit medium effect (step 052IWS9719). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 052IWS9720), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) is executed (step 052IWS9721).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process (step S174) (step 052IWS9722).

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (that is, when the missed symbol is displayed) (N of step 052IWS9704 and N of step 052IWS9715), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 052IWS9723).

(Ending production processing)
FIG. 10-53 is a flowchart showing an ending effect process (step S177) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step 052IWS951). The effect period measurement timer is set based on the completion of all rounds of the jackpot game in the jackpot middle effect process (see step S176). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step 052IWS952).

When the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step 052IWS952), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 052IWS953), and the effect device (image display device 5) according to the contents of the process data n. , Game effect lamp 9, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) is executed (step 052IWS954). For example, an effect of displaying the end of a big hit or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 052IWS955), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 052IWS956). Then, the process timer setting value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step 052IWS957).

If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 052IWS952), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot game ending this time is a jackpot game based on a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot (step). 052IWS958). Whether or not the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 6R normal jackpot is determined is, for example, whether or not the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area is the display result 3 designation command or the display result 4 designation command. Can be determined by checking. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to end the display of the prize ball number display (step 052IWS959).

By executing the processes of steps 052IWS958 to S959, in this example, when the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 6R normal jackpot is executed, the prize ball number display is displayed during the jackpot game, and the jackpot is displayed. The prize ball number display is erased at the end of the game, and the prize ball number display is not displayed during the high probability / first KT state or low probability / first KT state after the big hit game ends.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot game ending this time is a jackpot game based on the 2R probability variation jackpot (step 052IWS960). Whether or not it is a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 5 designation command. If it is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the prize ball number display is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS961). If the prize ball number display is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the prize ball number display (step 052IWS962).

By executing the process of steps 052IWS960 to S962, in this example, when the jackpot game based on the 2R probability variation jackpot is executed, the prize ball number display is not displayed during the jackpot game (however, however). In this example, if the prize ball number display is displayed before the 2R probability variation big hit, the prize ball number display is continuously displayed but the display is not updated), and the high probability after the big hit game is completed. / During the 2nd KT state, the prize ball number display is displayed.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the effect control process flag value to a value corresponding to the variable display start wait process (step S170) (step 052IWS963).

(Production example)
Next, an effect mode of the effect executed in the feature unit 052IW will be described. First, an effect mode of the set value suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 10-54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of the set value suggestion effect. In this example, it is possible to execute the setting value suggestion effect in the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of alignment. As shown in FIG. 10-54 (A), when the variable display of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right is executed on the image display device 5, the execution timing of the set value suggestion effect is set to FIG. 10-54 (B1). )-(B3), the set value suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-54 (B1) to (B3), the set value suggestion effect is executed by displaying the predetermined character image 052IW001,052IW002,052IW003 on the image display device 5. In this case, for example, when the set value suggestion effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B1), the image display device 5 is set by displaying a predetermined character image 052IW001 in a blue display color. The value suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when the set value suggestion effect C is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B2), the set value is set according to the mode in which the predetermined character image 052IW002 is displayed in the yellow display color on the image display device 5. The suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when the set value suggestion effect E is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B3), the set value is set according to the mode in which the predetermined character image 052IW003 is displayed in the red display color on the image display device 5. The suggestion effect is executed.

In the example shown in FIGS. 10-54, the case where the set value suggestion effect A, the set value suggestion effect C, and the set value suggestion effect E are executed is shown, but for example, when the set value suggestion effect B is executed. Displays a predetermined character image in a green display color, displays a predetermined character image in an orange display color when the set value suggestion effect D is executed, and a rainbow when the set value suggestion effect F is executed. A predetermined character image is displayed in the display color of the color.

In this example, which setting value is currently set for the player depending on whether a character image having a different display color is displayed and the setting value suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of alignment. You can have a sense of expectation for it.

Next, the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 10-55 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. In this example, it is possible to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect in the variable display of the decorative symbol that is out of the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH).

In this example, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (A), for example, a character display 052IW004 such as "small hit RUSH" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the second KT state is displayed. It is recognizable that it is inside. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (A), when the image display device 5 is executing the variable display of the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right during the second KT state, the execution timing of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 (B1) to (B3), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 (B1) and (B2), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed by displaying the predetermined effect image 052IW005, 052IW006 on the image display device 5. In this example, a case where an image of a racing car is displayed as a predetermined effect image 052IW005, 052IW006 is shown. In this case, for example, when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (B1), the image display device 5 displays a predetermined effect image 052IW005 in a blue display color. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (B2), the predetermined effect image 052IW005 is displayed in the red display color on the image display device 5. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed.

In this example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect during the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of the second KT state, or the effect image of any display color is displayed to suggest the small hit RUSH continuation. Depending on whether the effect is executed, the player can be expected to continue the second KT state (small hit RUSH).

Next, the display mode of the right-handed notification will be described. FIG. 10-56 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display mode of the right-handed notification. In this example, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the big hit is performed, the jackpot game is in progress. As shown in FIG. 10-56 (1), the right-handed display 26 is turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) (see steps 052IWS2018A and S2018B). Further, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (1), the right-handed lighting notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2019A, S2019B, S639). reference). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (1), the effect control CPU 120 displays the right-handed display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 (see step 052IWS624).

Further, in this example, when a small hit is obtained in the variation display of the second special symbol, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (2)) during the small hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on by the CPU 103) (see step 052IWS2024B). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (2), the right-handed lighting notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command (see steps 052IWS2025B and S639). .. However, unlike during the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (2), the right-handed display 052IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

On the other hand, in this example, when a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right-handed display 26 is turned on and the right is turned on during the small hit game as shown in FIG. 10-56 (3). The hitting notification LED 37 is not turned on, and the right-handed hitting display 052IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

Next, the production modes of the over-winning suggestion effect, the small hit-winning suggestion effect, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect will be described. 10-57 and 10-58 are explanatory views for explaining the production modes of the over-winning suggestion effect, the small hit winning suggestion effect, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect. In FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, the display screens change in the order of (A), (B), (C) .... Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, there is a case where the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the 10R probability variation big hit is obtained.

As shown in FIG. 10-57 (A), during the big hit game, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "Big hit!" And a round number display such as "Round 2". The prize ball number display 052IW008 is displayed. In addition, when a normal prize (a prize that is not an over prize) to the big prize opening occurs during the big hit game, the prize is displayed in the normal display color (white in this example) as shown in FIG. 10-57 (B). 052IW009 (in this example, the character display of "+15") is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see steps 052IWS307 and S308).

Next, it is assumed that an over-winning occurs during the big hit game, and the execution of the suggestion effect at the time of over-winning is decided based on the occurrence of the over-winning. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-57 (C), the winning display 052IW010 (in this example, the character display of "+15") is displayed according to the type of the determined over-winning suggestion effect, and the speaker 8L is displayed. , 8R outputs a winning sound according to the type of the determined over-winning suggestion effect (see steps 052IWS305 and S306). For example, when the over-winning suggestion effect A is executed, the winning display is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and the winning sound of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, it is assumed that the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 456 and the number of prize balls reaches 456. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-57 (D), the character display 052IW011 such as "456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed (see step 052IWS360).

In this example, the case where the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed is shown. However, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is decided, the image display device 5 shows "555". A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is determined, a character display such as "666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-58 (E), when the big hit game is finished, the game state is controlled to the high probability / second KT state after the big hit game is finished. Further, when controlled to the high probability / second KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-58 (F), a character display such as "Small hit RUSH in progress!" Is displayed, and the prize ball number display 052IW008 continues. Is displayed.

Next, during the high probability / second KT state, a small hit occurs and a game ball is won in the special winning opening, but if it is not decided to execute the suggestion effect at the time of the small hit winning, FIG. 10-58. As shown in (F), the winning display 052IW012 (in this example, the character display of "+10") is displayed in the normal display color (white in this example), and the normal sound is won from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output (see steps 052IWS325, S326).

Next, during the high probability / second KT state, a small hit occurs and a game ball wins in the special winning opening, and a suggestion effect at the time of small hit winning occurs based on the winning of the game ball in the special winning opening. It is assumed that the execution of is decided. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-58 (G), the winning display 052IW013 (in this example, the character display of "+10") is displayed according to the type of the determined small hit winning suggestion effect, and the speaker is displayed. From 8L and 8R, a winning sound corresponding to the type of the determined small hit winning suggestion effect is output (see steps 052IWS323 and S324). For example, when the small hit winning suggestion effect A is executed, the winning display is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and the winning sound of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, it is assumed that the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 2666 and the number of prize balls reaches 2666 during the high probability / second KT state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-58 (H), the character display 052IW014 such as "2666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed (see step 052IWS360).

In this example, the case where the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed is shown. However, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is decided, the image display device 5 “2456”. A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect E, a character display such as "2555 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, although not shown, for example, the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect A is determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 1000. If this is the case, a character display such as "1000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number emphasizing effect A is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect B is determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 2000, a character display such as "2000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasis effect B is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect C is determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 3000, a character display such as "3000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasis effect C is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect D is determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 4000, a character display such as "4000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasis effect D is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect E is determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 5000, a character display such as "5000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasis effect E is executed.

In this example, the number of prize balls has reached 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666 (in other words, a small hit during a big hit game or a high probability / second KT state). Although the case where the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F are executed at different selection ratios according to the total of the game values given by the above, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, depending on the number of small hits that occurred during the high probability / second KT state and the number of executions of the variation display executed during the high probability / second KT state, the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F differ. May be configured to perform, and various aspects are conceivable.

Next, the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol while the variation display of one special symbol is being executed will be described. FIG. 10-59 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that is a big hit, the variation display of the first special symbol is a probability variation jackpot (10R probability variation in this example). In the case of a jackpot fluctuation that is a jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot), as shown in FIG. 10-59 (A), the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, step 052IWS1120A, Step 052 See Y in IWS1128A).

On the other hand, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation of a normal jackpot (6R normal jackpot in this example), the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 10-59 (B). When this is done, the variation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see N in step 052IWS1128A and step 052IWS1129A).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-59 (C). Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, step 052IWS1120A, Step 052 See N in IWS1127A).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol that is a big hit, the variation display of the second special symbol is a probability variation jackpot (10R probability variation in this example). In the case of a jackpot fluctuation that is a jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot), as shown in FIG. 10-59 (D), even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is displayed. Is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, step 052IWS1120B, Step 052 See Y in IWS1128B).

On the other hand, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation that is a normal jackpot (in this example, 2R normal jackpot), the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 10-59 (E). When this is done, the variation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see N in step 052IWS1128B and step 052IWS1129B).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol that becomes a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-59 (F). Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, step 052IWS1120B, Step 052 See N in IWS1127B).

The control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol is not limited to the embodiment shown in this example. Hereinafter, a modified example of the control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed will be described.

(Modification 1)
FIG. 10-60 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first modification. In FIG. 10-60, the processing of steps 052IWS1120A to S1127A is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 10-19, but in the first modification, the determination processing of step 052IWS1128A shown in FIG. 10-19 does not exist. ..

In the first modification, if the variation display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 directly proceeds to the process of step S1129A, and sends the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120. (Step 052IWS1129A). In FIG. 10-60, the process of step 052IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

FIG. 10-61 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the first modification. In FIG. 10-61, the processing of steps 052IWS1120B to S1127B is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 10-22, but in the modified example 1, the determination processing of step 052IWS1128B shown in FIG. 10-22 does not exist. ..

In the first modification, if the variation display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 directly proceeds to the process of step S1129B, and sends a second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120. (Step 052IWS1129B). In FIG. 10-61, the process of step 052IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-22.

FIG. 10-62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modified example 1.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the fluctuation display of the first special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that becomes a probable change jackpot? As shown in FIG. 10-62 (A), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly missed, regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is a normal jackpot. The stop display is displayed (see N in step 052IWS1127A and step 052IWS1129A).

On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-62 (B). Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, step 052IWS1120A, Step 052 See N in IWS1127A).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the fluctuation display of the second special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that becomes a probable change jackpot? As shown in FIG. 10-62 (C), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly missed as shown in FIG. The stop display is displayed (see N in step 052IWS1127B and step 052IWS1129B).

On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-62 (D). Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, step 052IWS1120B, Step 052 See N in IWS1127B).

(Modification 2)
FIG. 10-63 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the second modification. In FIG. 10-63, the processes of steps 052IWS1120A to S1126A are the same as those processes shown in FIG. 10-19, but in the modified example 2, the determination process of steps 052IWS1127A and S1128A shown in FIG. 10-19 is used. Instead, the process of step 052IWS1127C is included.

In the second modification, if the variation display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the CPU 103 controls to send the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A). In FIG. 10-63, the process of step 052IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

FIG. 10-64 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the second modification. In FIG. 10-64, the processes of steps 052IWS1120B to S1126B are the same as those processes shown in FIG. 10-22, but in the modified example 2, the determination process of steps 052IWS1127B and S1128B shown in FIG. 10-22 is used. Instead, the process of step 052IWS1127D is included.

In the second modification, if the variation display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the CPU 103 controls to send the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129B). In FIG. 10-64, the process of step 052IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-22.

FIG. 10-65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modification 2.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the fluctuation display of the first special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that becomes a probable change jackpot? As shown in FIG. 10-65 (A), even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continued regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is usually a big hit. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, step 052IWS1120A, Step 052 See Y in IWS1127C).

On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-65 (B). When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see N in step 052IWS1127C and step 052IWS1129A).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the fluctuation display of the second special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that becomes a probable change jackpot? As shown in FIGS. 10-65 (C), even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continued regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is usually a big hit. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, step 052IWS1120B, Step 052 See Y in IWS1127D).

On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-65 (D). When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see N in step 052IWS1127D and step 052IWS1129B).

Further, as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol while the variation display of one special symbol is being executed, for example, other than those shown in the modification 1 and the modification 2, for example, the deviation is lost. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol, the forced loss is stopped, while the variation display of the first special symbol that is a small hit is performed. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation may be continued.

Further, for example, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which is the 10R probability variation jackpot, the small hit symbol is forcibly stopped and stopped, while the 2R probability variation jackpot is obtained. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation may be continued.

Further, for example, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the normal state (low probability / low base state), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol being executed is out of alignment and fluctuates. It may be configured to stop forcibly regardless of whether it is a small hit fluctuation or a big hit fluctuation. With such a configuration, in this example, if the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed in the low probability / high base state, the transition to the low probability / low base state is performed (see FIG. 10-29), but 50 times. When 1 to 4 second hold memories are accumulated when the fluctuation display is finished and the transition to the low probability / low base state is performed, and if there is a second hold memory that becomes a big hit, the forced loss stop is performed. This makes it possible to prevent a big hit at an unintended timing. In particular, in a gaming machine configured to be controllable to the KT state as in this example, by performing a right-handed operation in the normal state (low probability / low base state), the second start winning opening is easy to win. It is also possible to make a start prize and display the fluctuation of the second special symbol, and at the same time, let the first start prize opening win the start and display the change of the first special symbol. It is effective as a preventive measure for the method.

As described above, various modes can be considered as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed.

(Modification 3)
In addition, the feature unit 052IW controls to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol by the same control in the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol. The case (see FIGS. 10-59) is shown, but different controls may be used. FIG. 10-66 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the modified example 3. In the modified example 3, the first special symbol variation process is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19. In FIG. 10-66, the processes of steps 052IWS1120B to S1125B are the same as those processes shown in FIG. 10-22, but in the modified example 3, the determination process of steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B shown in FIG. 10-22 is performed. not exist. Therefore, in the third modification, unless the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (N in step 052IWS1125B), the CPU 103 ends the process as it is.

FIG. 10-67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modification 3.

As shown in FIGS. 10-67 (A) and 10-67 (C), in the modified example 3, a small hit is displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a miss, a small hit, or a probable variable big hit. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, as in FIGS. 10-59 (A) and 10-59 (C). Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-67 (D) and (F), the small hit symbol is stopped in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol which is a miss, a small hit, or a probable variable big hit. When it is displayed, similarly to FIGS. 10-59 (D) and (F), even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-67 (B), in the modified example 3, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit. Similarly to FIG. 10-59 (B), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as an off symbol.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-67 (E), in the modified example 3, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit. In, unlike FIG. 10-59 (E), the variation display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-67, in the modified example 3, the variation display of the special symbol is forcibly removed by the symbol when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. The control to display the stop is different.

In the modified example 3, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol which is a normal big hit, the small hit symbol is forcibly stopped and stopped, while the normal big hit is performed. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the case where the variable display is continued is shown, but it is limited to such a mode. No. For example, conversely, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol while the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a normal big hit, is being executed, the variation display is continued, while the normal jackpot is displayed. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, it may be configured to be forcibly stopped. Also, for example, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that is a big hit (regardless of whether it is a probable variable jackpot or a normal jackpot), it is forcibly missed. On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit (regardless of whether it is a probable variable jackpot or a normal jackpot), it changes. It may be configured to continue the display. In this way, the control for forced loss stop may be different depending on whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in some form.

(Modification example 4)
FIG. 10-68 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the modified example 4. In FIGS. 10-68, the processes of steps 052IWS1120A to S1128A are similar to those processes shown in FIGS. 10-19.

In the fourth modification, when the variation display of the first special symbol that does not become either a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, a 6R normal jackpot) is being executed in step 052IWS1128A, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag. Check if it is set (step 052IWS1131A). If the probability change flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability change state), the process ends as it is. If the probability change flag is set (that is, if it is in the probability change state), the CPU 103 controls to send the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A). The process of step 052IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

In the modification 4, when the determination process of step 052IWS1131A is executed, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit. The variation display of the first special symbol is not uniformly stopped and displayed by the missing symbol, but the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed by the missing symbol when the probability change state is in progress. On the other hand, even during the variable display of the first special symbol, which is usually a big hit, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, unless it is in the probability variation state.

FIG. 10-69 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the modified example 4. In FIG. 10-69, the processing of steps 052IWS1120B to S1128B is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 10-22.

In the fourth modification, when the variation display of the first special symbol that does not become a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, a 2R normal jackpot) is being executed in step 052IWS1128B, the CPU 103 Checks whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 052IWS1131B). If the probability change flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability change state), the process ends as it is. If the probability change flag is set (that is, if it is in the probability change state), the CPU 103 controls to send the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129B). The process of step 052IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-22.

In the modification 4, when the determination process of step 052IWS1131B is executed, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit. The variation display of the second special symbol is not uniformly stopped and displayed by the missing symbol, but the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed by the missing symbol when the probability change state is in progress. On the other hand, even during the variable display of the second special symbol, which is usually a big hit, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, unless it is in the probability variation state.

In the modified example 4, a case is shown in which control is performed to forcibly stop and display the symbol with a missed pattern depending on whether or not the probability change flag is set (whether or not it is in the probability change state), but only in such an embodiment. I can't. For example, it may be configured to perform control to forcibly stop and display the missed symbol depending on whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set. Further, for example, the control may be configured to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol only when the high probability / low base state (high probability flag is on and high base flag is off). As such, it may be configured to perform control to forcibly stop and display with a detached symbol according to the current gaming state in some form.

In addition, when the control is configured to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol only in the high probability / low base state as described above, it is possible to prevent a normal big hit by the variable display of one of the identification information. It is possible to prevent the second KT state (small hit RUSH) from being interrupted.

As described above, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") having different advantages for the player. be. In addition, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is a state different from the advantageous state. It is possible to control a special state (for example, a KT state) in which value is easily given. Then, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect (for example, a small hit winning suggestion effect) in response to the passage of the game medium (for example, a game ball) through a specific area (for example, a special winning opening). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion production.

Specifically, in this example, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect at the time of the small hit winning based on the fact that the game ball wins in the special winning opening during the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH). However, since the winning frequency to the special winning opening is particularly high during the small hit RUSH, it is possible to pay attention to the setting suggestion effect (in this example, the suggestion effect at the time of the small hit prize), and improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect. be able to.

In this example, a setting suggestion effect (in this example, a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize) is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening as a specific area. I can't be limited. For example, even if the setting suggestion effect can be executed based on the starting winning opening (winning ball device 6A, variable winning ball device 6B), the general winning opening 10, and the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening as a specific area. good. Further, as a specific area, the setting suggestion effect may be configured to be executable based on the entry of the game ball into the out opening. Further, for example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gates such as the passing gate 41 as a specific area.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to set any of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") having different advantages for the player. In addition, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is a state different from the advantageous state. It is possible to control a special state (for example, a KT state) in which value is easily given. Further, the setting suggestion effect (for example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect) can be executed, and the ease of executing the setting suggestion effect differs depending on the length of the period controlled to the special state (for example, FIGS. 10-43). As shown in, when the number of prize balls reaches 456, the prize ball number display suggestion effect A can be executed with a 3% probability, and when the number of prize balls reaches 555, the prize balls have a 2% probability. The number display suggestion effect B can be executed, the prize ball number display suggestion effect C can be executed with a 1% probability when the number of prize balls reaches 666, and 5 when the number of prize balls reaches 2456. The prize ball number display suggestion effect D can be executed with a% probability, and when the number of prize balls reaches 2555, the prize ball number display suggestion effect E can be executed with a 3% probability, and the number of prize balls is 2666. When the number is reached, there is a 2% chance that the prize ball number display suggestion effect F can be executed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion production.

In this example, as the "length of the period controlled by the special state", the timing when the number of prize balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, 2666 (in other words, in other words). Although the case where the prize ball number display suggestion effect is executed in the period until a certain game value is given), the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the "length of the period controlled by the special state" is controlled by the length of the period controlled by the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game state) or the special state (in this example, the small hit game state). It may be the length of the period to be used, or it may be the total length of these periods.

When the length of the period controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state) is used as the "length of the period controlled to the special state", the length of the period from the fanfare to the ending of the big hit game is used. Alternatively, the length of the period of only the round game during the big hit game may be used. In this case, for example, the longer the period from the fanfare of the big hit game to the ending, the higher the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed. Further, for example, in the case of a big hit with a small number of rounds during the big hit game, the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than the big hit with a large number of rounds.

Further, for example, as "the length of the period controlled by the special state", the number of small hits generated during the high probability / second KT state and the number of executions of the variation display executed during the high probability / second KT state are used. Depending on the situation, it may be configured to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect. In this case, for example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate as the number of small hits increases, or the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate as the number of executions of the variable display increases. .. Further, for example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a high rate at the timing when the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH) ends, and various as "the length of the period controlled by the special state". Is conceivable.

Generally, in a gaming machine, when the number of prize balls reaches a certain number and a display such as "XXXXXX OVER" is displayed, the prize ball number emphasis effect "1000 OVER" shown in this example is used. It is displayed in units with a certain degree of limitation, such as displaying in units of 1000 prize balls, such as displaying "2000 OVER". On the other hand, the prize ball number display suggestion effect shown in this example is a timing different from the usual timing when the number of prize balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, 2666. Since it is executed in, it is possible to expect a high setting while giving a sense of discomfort to the occurrence timing of the prize ball number display suggestion effect, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state). Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state). Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). In addition, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a display result of variable display, and a special display result as a display result of variable display. Is included as a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Further, it is possible to set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") in which the number of specific determination values is different. Further, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, appropriate playability can be realized.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect in response to control to a special state (for example, a small hit occurs during a high probability / second KT state, and a game ball wins a prize in the special winning opening. Based on what you have done, it is possible to perform a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize and a suggestion effect of displaying the number of prize balls). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the control to the special state.

In this example, a setting suggestion effect (in this example, a small hit winning suggestion effect and a prize ball number display suggestion effect) is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening. , Not limited to such aspects. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at the start of the small hit game during the small hit fluctuation or when the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to be in the open state. Further, for example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed by changing the small hit notification mode when a small hit occurs. As such, it suffices if the setting suggestion effect is executed in response to the control of the small hit in some form.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 17) are played when the game is controlled in an advantageous state and when the game is controlled in a special state. The medium (for example, a game ball) can be controlled into an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) and a difficult-to-enter or impossible-easy-to-enter state (for example, a closed state). Further, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect in response to the fact that the variable means is controlled to the easy-to-enter state (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 17 are opened, and the size is large. Based on the fact that a game ball has been won in the winning opening or the special winning opening, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize or a suggestion effect of displaying the number of prize balls). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the control of the variable means.

In this example, when the setting suggestion effect (in this example, the suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize and the suggestion effect of displaying the number of prize balls) is executed based on the winning of the game ball in the large winning opening or the special winning opening. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to be in the open state and the opening effect is executed, the setting suggestion effect is executed by changing the effect mode of the opening effect. It may be configured as follows. As such, it suffices as long as it executes the setting suggestion effect in response to the fact that the variable means is controlled to the easy-to-enter state in some form.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, when the control of the game state is switched (for example, at the start or end of the big hit game, when the low probability / first KT state is changed to the normal state (low probability / low base state). ), The setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the display mode (for example, the display color) of the right-handed display is changed in step 052IWS624). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the switching of the control of the gaming state.

In this example, "when the control of the game state is switched" is set at the start or end of the big hit game, or when shifting from the low probability / first KT state to the normal state (low probability / low base state). Although the case where the suggestion effect is configured to be feasible is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the production period when shifting to the big hit game during the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH), or shifting from the big hit game to the high base state (high probability / first KT state or low probability / first KT state). The setting suggestion effect may be configured to be feasible during the effect period. Further, for example, a gaming machine configured to execute a predetermined number of fluctuation displays during a high base state or to shift to a high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH) based on a predetermined number of small hits. In the production period when shifting from the high base state to the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH), the setting suggestion effect may be configured to be executable, and various as "when the control of the gaming state is switched". Is conceivable.

Further, in this example, the case where the setting suggestion effect is executed by changing the display mode of the right-handed display or the left-handed display is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed by changing the effect of the fanfare effect at the start of the big hit and the effect of the ending effect at the end of the big hit, and various modes can be considered.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, according to the number of controls to the special state in the special state, the total game value given by the special state in the special state, or the number of times the variable display is executed in the special state. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect with different selection ratios (for example, the prizes are awarded with different selection ratios depending on the number of prize balls reaching 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666. The ball number display suggestion effects A to F are executed, or, for example, according to the number of small hits generated during the high probability / second KT state and the number of executions of the variation display executed during the high probability / second KT state. , The prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F may be executed at different selection ratios). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the number of times of control to the special state, the total of the game value, or the number of times of executing the variable display.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, as special states, an advantageous special state (for example, a second KT state) and a disadvantageous special state (for example, a first KT state) which is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the advantageous special state. Is controllable. Further, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect by different selection ratios when the game medium passes through the specific area during the advantageous special state and when the game medium passes through the specific area during the disadvantageous special state (for example). Only when a small hit is made and a game ball wins in the special winning opening during the second KT state, the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number display suggestion effect can be executed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the type of special state.

In this example, the case where the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number display suggestion effect can be executed only when the game ball wins in the special winning opening during the second KT state is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, even if a game ball wins in the special winning opening during the 1st KT state, a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize or a suggestion effect of displaying the number of prize balls can be executed, and the game ball is inserted in the special winning opening during the 2nd KT state. Depending on whether the prize is won or the game ball is won in the special winning opening during the 1st KT state, it is possible to execute the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number display suggestion effect at different rates. It may be configured. Further, for example, even when an irregular game ball is won in the special winning opening during the non-KT state, the small hit winning suggestion effect or the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be enabled to be executed. ..

In the case of the above configuration, if a prize is awarded to the special winning opening in the 1st KT state (high base state) or an irregular winning occurs, or if a winning is generated in the special winning opening during the 2nd KT state. In comparison with, a small hit winning suggestion effect or a prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a high rate, or a small hit winning suggestion effect or a prize ball number display suggestion effect may be performed. It may be configured to run.

In this feature unit 052IW, the value of the prize ball counter and the number of prize balls are displayed during the big hit game based on the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, and the 6R normal jackpot and during the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH). Is updated, and the value of the prize ball counter is not updated during the big hit game based on the 2R probability variation hit and the 2R normal big hit and during the high base state (high probability / 1st KT state, low probability / 1st KT state). The prize ball number counter is not reset), and in principle, the prize ball number display is hidden, and the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed in the low probability / first KT state to the normal state (low probability / low base state). The case where the value of the prize ball counter is controlled to be reset at the time of transition is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. The value of the prize ball counter may be updated even during the big hit game based on the 2R probability variable big hit or the 2R normal big hit.

In this example, by configuring as described above, for example, the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH) is terminated and the high base state (high probability / first KT state, low probability / first KT) is terminated. If a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs during the high base state and then shifts to the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH) again, the prize in the previous small hit RUSH. With the number of balls inherited, the value of the prize ball counter can be updated and the prize ball number display can be displayed.

Further, not limited to the mode of displaying the number of prize balls as shown in this example, for example, when the 10R probability variation big hit is reached and the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH) is entered, the high probability / second KT state (Small hit RUSH) and the big hit game immediately before that may be set as one section, and the total number of prize balls in the section may be totaled and the total value may be displayed. Further, for example, the setting suggestion effect suggesting the current set value may be executed by changing the display mode (display color in this example) of the aggregated value.

Further, in the feature unit 052IW, as a "setting suggestion effect", a small hit winning suggestion effect or a prize ball number display suggestion effect is performed in a manner in which the current set value suggests one of the set values "1" to "6". Has been shown, but is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, instead of suggesting the current setting value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed by suggesting whether or not the setting change has been made to change the setting value when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. good. As such, the "setting suggestion effect" may be any form of suggestion regarding the setting.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel. , When a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and the variable display display result is special. When the display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed, it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Further, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and the first specific display result is derived and displayed. It is more advantageous for the player than the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, it is controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game is completed). Further, during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the first specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information. The display result of the variable display of the identification information is not derived and displayed based on the derivation display (for example, the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the first special symbol or the first special symbol or the first 2 The variable display of the special symbol is continuously executed). Further, during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information. Based on the derivation display of It is forcibly stopped and displayed). Therefore, it is possible to realize control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

Specifically, when the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold of one of the identification information results in a normal big hit (non-probable variable big hit) even though the transition to the second KT state (small hit RUSH) or the probable change state has occurred. The second KT state (small hit RUSH) or the probability change state will end immediately, and there is a risk that the interest in the game will decline. On the other hand, if the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold of the identification information on one side is forcibly forcibly off and the symbol is stopped and displayed (forced off), even the variable display that is a probable change jackpot will be forcibly off. Therefore, the game value given to the player in the advantageous state (big hit game state) is reduced, which is not preferable. Therefore, in this feature unit 052IW, while the fluctuation display that is a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) is forcibly missed, the fluctuation display that is a probability variation jackpot is extended (interruption of measurement of fluctuation time). , While suppressing the decrease in the game value given to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In this example, as an embodiment of "not stopping the variable display of one of the identification information", the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed. Has been shown in the case of continuous execution, but is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is interrupted (paused), and the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that was interrupted after the end of the small hit game is resumed. You may. It suffices as long as it does not completely stop the variable display in some form.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, the second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) due to the special state is easily given. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value is easily given by the special state.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change)) that is different from the advantageous state and is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state as compared with the non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). The state)) can be controlled. Further, the first specific display result is controlled to a specific state based on the derivation display (for example, the probable change state is controlled after the end of the big hit game based on the probabilistic big hit), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed. Based on this, it is controlled to a non-specific state (for example, it is not controlled to a probable change state after the end of a big hit game based on a normal big hit). Therefore, it is possible to realize control considering whether or not it is controlled to a specific state.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change)) that is different from the advantageous state and is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state as compared with the non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). The state)) can be controlled. Further, it is possible to control the specific state based on the passage of the game medium (for example, the game ball) through the specific region (for example, V region 052IW104) while being controlled to the advantageous state. Then, when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the gaming medium passes through the specific area at a higher rate when the second specific display result is derived and displayed, as compared with the case where the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (See Fig. 10-11). Therefore, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the special display result can be derived and displayed in either the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (). See FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Further, the first identification is based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of the first identification information. The variable display of information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (see FIG. 10-67 (B)). Further, when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result in the variable display of the second identification information, the second identification information is displayed. Control is not performed to derive and display the variable display of the above with a predetermined display result (see FIG. 10-67 (E)). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control considering whether the first identification information is the variable display or the second identification information is the variable display.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change)) that is different from the advantageous state and is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state as compared with the non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). The state)) can be controlled. Further, the variable display executing means is a variable display of the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information when controlled to a specific state, and is a variable display corresponding to the second specific display result. Based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with the predetermined display result (FIGS. 10-68, 10-). See 69). Further, when controlled to the non-specific state, during execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the other identification information as the predetermined display result is not performed (see FIGS. 10-68 and 10-69). ). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of whether or not the control is performed in a specific state.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is based on the fact that the game medium (for example, the game ball) has entered the first start area (for example, the first start winning opening). ) Can be variably displayed, and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be variably displayed based on the entry of the game medium into the second start area (for example, the second start winning opening). It is possible. Further, a variable means (for example, a special variable prize) that can be changed into a first state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter and a second state (for example, a closed state) in which the game medium is difficult to enter or cannot enter. A ball device 17) is provided. Further, after the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is executed, an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state) and a special state having a lower advantage than the advantageous state (for example, a special state). For example, it can be controlled to either the small hit game state), and the variable means is controlled to the first state when it is controlled to the special state. Further, the first start area is provided so that the game medium moving on a predetermined path (for example, the left area of the game area) can enter the movement path in which the game medium can move, and the variable means is out of the movement path. A game medium that moves on a specific route (for example, the area to the right of the game area) is provided so as to be accessible. Further, it is possible to execute a specific notification (for example, a right-handed notification shown in FIGS. 10-56 (1) and (2)) for promoting the launch of the game medium to the specific route, and the first identification information is variably displayed. When the special state is controlled after the execution of, the specific notification is not executed (see, for example, FIG. 10-56 (3)). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the promotion of the launch of the game medium.

Specifically, as shown in the feature unit 052IW, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, and the small hit type on the first special symbol side can be executed. It is configured so that the winning rate (advantage) to the special winning opening is lower than that of the small hit type on the 2nd special symbol side, and when a small hit is made in the variable display of the 1st special symbol, the 2nd special If the variable display of the symbol is forcibly disengaged and stopped, if the right-handed notification is executed for the small hit on the side of the first special symbol with a low winning rate (advantage), it is practically Although it is almost impossible to expect a prize in the special winning opening, the player will waste the game ball, and on the contrary, a disadvantageous launch promotion notification will be given, which is not preferable. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed notification is executed for the small hit on the second special symbol side, while the right-handed notification is not executed for the small hit on the first special symbol side. , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to the player's wasteful hitting, and it is possible to realize appropriate notification.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the first reserved storage means (for example, the first reserved storage buffer) that can store the information related to the variable display of the first identification information as the reserved storage and the variable display of the second identification information. It is provided with a second reserved storage means (for example, a second reserved storage buffer) that can store information about the information. Further, when the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the display result of the variable display of the second identification information, the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot gaming state) is set. It is controllable, and a special state (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or a display result of the variable display of the second identification information (for example, a small hit symbol). It is possible to control the small hit game state). Further, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the frequency at which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information becomes the special display result is increased. Further, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed as the display result of one of the variable displays when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel. As the display result of the other variable display, a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display can be forcibly terminated, and the reserved memory can be smoothly digested.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, a predetermined value can be given when controlled to a special state (for example, 10 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of a game ball to the special winning opening). It is possible to give a value higher than a predetermined value when controlled to an advantageous state (for example, 15 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of a game ball to the big winning opening). Further, as the specific notification, the first specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 shown in FIGS. 10-56 (1) and (2)) and the first specific notification are more visible than the first specific notification. It is possible to execute the second specific notification (for example, the display of the right-handed display 052IW007 shown in FIG. 10-56 (1)) having a high possibility. Further, when the control is performed in an advantageous state, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed (see FIG. 10-56 (1)), and after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the control is performed in the special state. At that time, the first specific notification is executed and the second specific notification is not executed (see FIG. 10-56 (2)). Therefore, it is possible to realize the notification corresponding to the value that can be given.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and then controlled to the special state, a higher ratio is more advantageous than when the variable display of the second identification information is executed and then controlled to the special state. It is controlled to a special state of a low degree (for example, small hit A). Further, when the variable display of the second identification information is executed and then controlled to a special state, the specific notification is executed (see FIGS. 10-56 (2) and (3)). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification in consideration of the player's advantage.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to execute a variable display effect (for example, variable display of a decorative pattern) corresponding to at least the variable display of the first identification information. Further, it is possible to execute a variable display effect of a common mode between when it is controlled to a special state and when it is not controlled to a special state (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs. , Forcibly stop and display the non-reach off symbol). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's recognition of being controlled to a special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed. In addition, the reserved storage stored by the second reserved storage means can be smoothly digested.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, a delay means for delaying the movement of the game medium (for example, a regulation piece provided in the variable winning ball device 6B) is provided on the upstream side of the variable means in the specific route. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the target from being targeted at the timing when the control to the special state is executed after the variable display of the second identification information is executed in the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen the strategy measures against the gaming machine.

The delay means is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 provided on the right side of the game area, a passage member for moving the game ball so as to meander from side to side is provided as a delay means. You may.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the effect is produced based on the game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) and the information from the game control means. It is provided with an effect control means for controlling (for example, an effect control CPU 120). Further, the game control means controls the execution of the notification by the notification means (for example, the right-handed display 26) that performs a predetermined notification. Further, the effect control means executes specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed notification LED 37) in response to the notification by the notification means. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification while reducing the processing load of the effect control means.

In this example, right-handed notification is executed during the jackpot game regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. The case is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a special variable winning ball device (left large winning opening) is provided on the left side of the game area, and a special variable winning ball device (right large winning opening) is also provided on the right side of the game area. If a big hit is made by the variable display of the symbol, the left big winning opening is opened during the big hit game, and if the big hit is made by the variable display of the second special symbol, the right big winning opening is opened during the big hit game. When applied to a gaming machine configured as described above, if a big hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, right-handed notification is executed during the big hit game, while the variable display of the first special symbol is used. In the case of a big hit, the right-handed notification may not be executed during the big hit game. Further, in the case of such a configuration, if a jackpot is obtained in the variation display of the first special symbol, the left-handed notification may be executed during the jackpot game. That is, the specific notification executing means may be configured to execute the specific notification when the variable means (in this example, the right-handed winning opening) is controlled to an advantageous state of the type to be controlled. With such a configuration, when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the left-handed notification is executed during the big-hit game to prevent the player from accidentally performing the right-handed operation. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player.

Further, in this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, a case where right-handed notification is executed even during the KT state is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, when the second start winning opening is applied to a gaming machine provided on the left side of the gaming area, the right-handed notification is not executed during the KT state, the high base state, or the reduced working hours state. May be good.

Further, in this example, in addition to lighting the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 only during the big hit game, right-handed notification is executed by displaying the right-handed display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, even in the second KT state (during small hit RUSH), when executing the first fluctuation display after the end of the big hit game, in addition to lighting the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37, the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 are lit. The right-handed display 052IW007 may be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 to execute the right-handed notification. Alternatively, in this case, for example, during the ending period at the end of the big hit game, the right-handed display 052IW007 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 in addition to the lighting of the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37. May be configured to execute right-handed notification.

Further, in this example, the right-handed display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, in addition to the relatively large size right-handed display 052IW007 as shown in FIG. 10-56 (1), the image display device 5 displays a symbol display (for example, a right-pointing triangle display) indicating right-handedness. May be configured to enable right-handed notification.

Further, the method of small hit control is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, it is equipped with a plurality of special variable winning ball devices, and the special variable winning ball device (special winning opening) to be opened is configured to be different depending on the small hit type. It may be configured so that the selection ratio of the small hit type is different depending on whether the case is a small hit or the case where the change display of the second special symbol is a small hit. In this case, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, it is easy to select the small hit type (or the small hit type in the open mode with a low winning rate) opened by the special variable winning ball device having a small number of prize balls. , When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, it is easy to select the small hit type (or the small hit type in the open mode with a high winning rate) opened by the special variable winning ball device having a large number of prize balls. It may be configured as.

Further, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol, a right-handed notification is performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-56 (2)), and the variation display of the first special symbol is performed. In the case where a small hit occurs, the right-handed notification is not performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-56 (3)), but when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol. It may be configured so that right-handed notification may not be performed. For example, if a small hit occurs when the second special symbol variation display is executed in a situation where a left-handed operation should be performed in a normal state, the right-handed notification is not performed during the small hit game. You may.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. Is. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). Further, it is possible to control a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable change state) and a specific state (for example, a probable change state) that is more likely to be controlled in an advantageous state than the non-specific state. In addition, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a display result of variable display, and a special display result as a display result of variable display. Is included as a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Further, it is possible to set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") in which the number of specific determination values is different. Further, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value, and is common when controlled to the non-specific state and when controlled to the specific state (FIGS. 10-3 and 10). See -4). Therefore, appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, if the lottery probability other than the jackpot winning probability and the type distribution change depending on the set value, the difference in the degree of advantage (difference in ball ejection performance) becomes too remarkable depending on the set value, and the gambling may become excessively high. There is. Therefore, in this feature unit 052IW, by making the number of special judgment values common regardless of the set value (the small hit winning probability is common), it is possible to prevent the difference in the degree of advantage from becoming excessively large depending on the set value. However, it prevents the gambling from becoming excessively high.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). Can be executed in parallel). Further, it is possible to control the display result of the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the frequency of becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is increased. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate playability in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, the special state is divided into a first special state (for example, a first KT state) and a second special state (for example, a second KT state) having a higher advantage than the first special state. It is controllable. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate playability in the gaming machine that can be controlled to the second special state.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to execute a special suggestion effect (for example, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 10-55) corresponding to the advantage of the special state. Therefore, by suggesting the advantage of the special state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, a predetermined display result (for example, a missed symbol) different from the specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) and the special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived as the display result of the variable display. When the variable display to be displayed is executed, the set value suggestion effect suggesting the set value (for example, the set value suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 10-54) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the set value suggestion effect.

In this example, the case where the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect and the set value suggestion effect are executed in the variable display that is out of the way is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect or the set value suggestion effect during the big hit game or the small hit game, and various aspects can be considered.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, the type of the special state is determined by using the special type determination value (for example, the small hit type determination value) for determining the type of the special state. Further, the number of special type determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-6). Therefore, more appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, in this feature unit 052IW, the number of special type determination values is common regardless of the set value (the distribution of small hit types is common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessive depending on the set value. It prevents it from growing and prevents it from becoming excessively gambling.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the case where the allocation of the small hit type is the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is used is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, the determination ratio of the small hit type may be different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6", and the advantage may be different depending on the set value.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 2R normal jackpot). Further, the type of the advantageous state is determined by using the advantageous type determination value (for example, the jackpot type determination value) for determining the type of the advantageous state. Further, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-5). Therefore, more appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, in this feature unit 052IW, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (the distribution of the jackpot type is common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessively large depending on the set value. It prevents it from becoming excessively high in gambling.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-5, the case where the jackpot type allocation is the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set is shown. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, the determination ratio of the jackpot type may be different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6", and the advantage may be different depending on the set value.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the variable display mode is determined by using the variable display mode determination value (for example, the variable pattern determination value) for determining the variable display mode. Further, the number of variable display mode determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-10). Therefore, more appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, in the feature unit 052IW, the number of variable display mode determination values is common regardless of the set value (the distribution of the fluctuation pattern is common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessive depending on the set value. It prevents it from growing and prevents it from becoming excessively gambling.

In particular, if the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value, the period from one small hit control to the next small hit control will change, and even if the small hit winning probability is common, it is advantageous in factors other than the big hit lottery. It is not preferable because the degree (difference in ball ejection performance) is greatly different, but in this feature unit 052IW, by making the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern common regardless of the set value, such a problem does not occur. ing.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-10, the case where the fluctuation pattern allocation is the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set is shown. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, the fluctuation efficiency is set to be different depending on the set value by making the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6" and providing the difference in the fluctuation time. It may be configured so that the advantage varies depending on the value.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. Is. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). In addition, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a display result of variable display, and a special display result as a display result of variable display. It is decided that the special judgment value for deciding to derive and display (for example, the judgment value for small hit judgment) and the predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result as the display result of the variable display. A predetermined determination value (for example, a determination value for determination of loss) is included. Further, it is possible to set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") in which the number of specific determination values is different. Further, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values, and the number of the predetermined determination values varies depending on the set values (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of guessing the set value and improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to control a non-specific state (for example, a non-specific change state) and a specific state (for example, a probable change state) which is more likely to be controlled to be more advantageous than the non-specific state. Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination value corresponding to the specific state of all the set values (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value in the specific state.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). It can be executed in parallel with the variable display). Further, the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is larger than the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state can be performed. The corresponding determination value includes a predetermined determination value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of guessing the set value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information becomes a special display result more frequently. Further, when a variable display that is controlled to a special state and a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) is derived and displayed is executed, a set value suggestion effect that suggests a set value (for example, the setting shown in FIGS. 10-54) is executed. Value suggestion effect) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the set value suggestion effect.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). Further, when the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot gaming state) which is advantageous for the player. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). In addition, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a display result of variable display, and a special display result as a display result of variable display. Is included as a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Further, it is possible to set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") in which the number of specific determination values is different. Further, among the determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-4), and the determination corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information. The number of special determination values differs between the value and the determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game while realizing appropriate game playability.

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148127), the degree of advantage of the variable display display result with respect to the control of deriving and displaying the variable display of the identification information as a predetermined display result (forced stoppage). It was not possible to realize control in consideration of. Therefore, for the purpose of providing the feature unit 052IW with a gaming machine capable of realizing control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, the gaming machines shown in the following (means A1) to (means A6) are shown below. The characteristic composition of is also disclosed.

(Means A1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and is a variable display of a first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and a second identification information (for example, a second special symbol). A variable display execution means (for example, a portion for executing steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) capable of executing the variable display of the symbol) in parallel, and a variable display display. As a result, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed, an advantageous state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) Specifically, a special state (for example, a portion in which steps S122 to S125 are executed in CPU 103) and a special state (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the advantageous state when the special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. For example, the variable display execution means is provided with special state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) that can be controlled in the small hit game state). Is the identification of one of the first identification information and the second identification information based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information while the variable display of the identification information is being executed. The first control that does not derive and display the display result of the variable display of information (for example, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol continues. (Executed), the second control (for example, the missing symbol is displayed and stopped (for example, the first special symbol or the first special symbol)) that derives and displays the variable display of one of the identification information with a predetermined display result (for example, the missing symbol). The variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed by the missing symbol))), and the first control and the second control are performed according to the display result derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, S1130B depending on the determination result of steps 052IWS1128A, S1128B. In the first modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is based on the determination results of steps 052IWS1127A and S1127B. Therefore, steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B are executed. For example, in the second modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of steps 052IWS1130C and S1130D. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means A2) In the means A1, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) due to the special state is easily given. Specifically, the CPU 103) may be configured to include a portion for executing step 052IWS2208). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value due to the special state is easily given.

(Means A3) In the means A1 or the means A2, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probabilistic big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol), and what is an advantageous state? A specific state control means (for example, a specific state control means) that can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is different and is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). The game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the portion that executes step 052IWS2206) in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is provided, and the specific state control means controls the specific state based on the derivation display of the first specific display result. (For example, the probability change state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot), and the second specific display result is controlled to the non-specific state based on the derivation display (for example, the end of the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot). It may be configured so that it is not controlled to a probabilistic state later). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not it is controlled to a specific state.

(Means A4) In any one of means A1 to means A3, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probabilistic jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , A specific state that is different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). A control means (for example, a portion for executing step 052IWS2206 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) is provided, and the specific state control means is a specific area (for example, when controlled to an advantageous state). A game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) can be controlled to a specific state based on the passage of the game medium (for example, a game ball) through the V region 052IW104). (S2405, S2204 to S2206 are executed), when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the ratio is higher when the second specific display result is controlled to an advantageous state as compared with the case where the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is long, while the opening period of FIG. 10-11 (2) is long. As shown in the above, in a big hit game based on a normal big hit, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 may be extremely short.) According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

(Means A5) In any one of means A1 to means A4, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probabilistic jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , The derivation display of the first specific display result has a higher advantage for the player than the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, it is controlled to a probable change state after the end of the big hit game). The variable display executing means can derive and display the special display result regardless of whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, game control). The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS64A and S64B. See FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4.), The first variable display of the identification information and the second specific display result. While the variable display corresponding to the above is being executed, the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the second identification information (for example, a modified example). In 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A and S1130A when N in step 052IWS1128A. See FIG. 10-67 (B)), variable second identification information. If the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the variable display of the second identification information is displayed as the predetermined display result. Control for derivation display is not performed (for example, in the modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) does not perform the processing of steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B. FIGS. 10-66 and 10-67. (E) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control considering whether the first identification information is the variable display or the second identification information is the variable display.

(Means A6) In any one of means A1 to means A5, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probabilistic jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , The derivation display of the first specific display result has a higher advantage for the player than the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, it is controlled to a probable change state after the end of the big hit game). Specific state control that is different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). The variable display executing means includes means (for example, a portion for executing step 052IWS2206 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)), and the variable display executing means provides the first identification information and when controlled to a specific state. Based on the fact that the special display result was derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the second identification information. Then, the variable display of the identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, in the modification 4, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is Y in steps 052IWS1131A and S1131B. Step 052 IWS1129A, S1130A are executed. See FIGS. 10-68 and 10-69.), When controlled to a non-specific state, the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is variable. If the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the variable display of the other identification information is displayed as the predetermined display result. (For example, in the modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not shift to steps 052IWS1129A and S1129B when N in steps 052IWS1131A and S1131B. -68, see FIG. 10-69). According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of whether or not the control is performed in a specific state.

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148127), the degree of advantage of the variable display display result with respect to the control of deriving and displaying the variable display of the identification information as a predetermined display result (forced stoppage). It was not possible to realize control in consideration of. Therefore, for the purpose of providing the feature unit 052IW with a gaming machine capable of realizing control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, the gaming machines shown in the following (means B1) to (means B6) are shown below. The characteristic composition of is also disclosed.

(Means B1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and is a variable display of a first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and a second identification information (for example, a second special symbol). A variable display execution means (for example, a portion for executing steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) capable of executing the variable display of the symbol) in parallel, and a variable display display. As a result, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, an advantageous state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) Specifically, a special state (for example, a portion in which steps S122 to S125 are executed in CPU 103) and a special state (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the advantageous state when the special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. For example, the variable display execution means is provided with special state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) that can be controlled in the small hit game state). Can derive and display the special display result in either the case of executing the variable display of the first identification information or the case of executing the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the game control microcomputer 100). (Specifically, CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS64A and S64B. See FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4.), Variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information. The first control (for example, the first fluctuation time) in which the display result of the variable display of the one identification information is not derived and displayed based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of The update of the timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed), and the variable display of the identification information of one of them is displayed as a predetermined display result (for example,). The second control (for example, the missing symbol is displayed and stopped (for example, the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed by the missing symbol)) is performed by the second control (for example, the missing symbol is displayed and stopped). It is feasible, and which of the first control and the second control is executed differs depending on the display result derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically). CPU103) is step 052 Step 052 IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, S1130B are executed according to the determination result of IWS1128A and S1128B. For example, in the first modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of steps 052IWS1127A and S1127B. For example, in the second modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of steps 052IWS1130C and S1130D. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means B2) In the means B1, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) due to the special state is easily given. Specifically, the CPU 103) may be configured to include a portion for executing step 052IWS2208). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value due to the special state is easily given.

(Means B3) In the means B1 or the means B2, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and the advantageous state is. A specific state control means (for example, a specific state control means) that can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is different and is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). The game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the portion that executes step 052IWS2206) in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is provided, and the specific state control means controls the specific state based on the derivation display of the first specific display result. (For example, the probability change state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot), and the non-specific state is controlled based on the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, the end of the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot). It may be configured so that it is not controlled to a probabilistic state later). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not it is controlled to a specific state.

(Means B4) In any one of means B1 to means B3, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probabilistic jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , A specific state that is different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). A control means (for example, a portion for executing step 052IWS2206 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) is provided, and the specific state control means is a specific area (for example, when controlled to an advantageous state). A game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) can be controlled to a specific state based on the passage of the game medium (for example, a game ball) through the V region 052IW104). (S2405, S2204 to S2206 are executed), when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the ratio is higher when the second specific display result is controlled to an advantageous state as compared with the case where the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is long. On the other hand, FIG. 10-11 (2). As shown in the above, in a big hit game based on a normal big hit, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 may be extremely short.) According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

(Means B5) In any one of means B1 to means B4, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probabilistic jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , The derivation display of the first specific display result has a higher advantage for the player than the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, it is controlled to a probable change state after the end of the big hit game). The variable display execution means is based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of the first identification information. , The variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, in the modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is set to N in step 052IWS1128A, steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A. 10-67 (B).), The special display in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of the second identification information. When the result is derived and displayed, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the second identification information by the predetermined display result is not performed (for example, in the modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)). Does not perform the processing of steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B. See FIGS. 10-66 and 10-67 (E)). According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control considering whether the first identification information is the variable display or the second identification information is the variable display.

(Means B6) In any one of means B1 to means B5, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probabilistic jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , The derivation display of the first specific display result is more advantageous to the player than the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, it is controlled to the probabilistic state after the end of the big hit game). Specific state control that is different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). The variable display executing means includes means (for example, a portion for executing step 052IWS2206 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)), and the variable display executing means receives the first identification information and when controlled to a specific state. Based on the fact that the special display result was derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the second identification information. Then, the variable display of the identification information is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, in the modification 4, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is Y in steps 052IWS1131A and S1131B. Step 052 IWS1129A, S1130A is executed. See FIGS. 10-68 and 10-69), the first identification information and one of the second identification information can be changed while being controlled to the non-specific state. If the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the variable display of the other identification information is displayed as the predetermined display result. (For example, in the modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not shift to steps 052IWS1129A and S1129B when N in steps 052IWS1131A and S1131B. -68, see FIG. 10-69). According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of whether or not the control is performed in a specific state.

The configuration shown by the feature unit 052IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown by the feature unit 21TM to form a gaming machine. For example, a configuration that makes it possible to change the set value shown by the feature unit 21TM is applied to the feature unit 052IW so that the set value suggestion effect can be executed, or the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect can be executed. , Right-handed notification can be executed, over-winning suggestion effect can be executed, small hit winning suggestion effect can be executed, and prize ball number display suggestion effect can be executed. You may do it. Further, for example, a configuration in which the set value shown by the feature unit 21TM can be changed is applied to the feature unit 052IW, and a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol while the variation display of one special symbol is being executed. In this case, the variable display of one of the special symbols may be forcibly stopped and displayed by the symbol, or the variable display may be continued.

Further, when the configuration shown by the feature unit 021TM is applied, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the setting value may be suggested by different aspects of the ending effect. In this case, for example, in the ending effect, a mode transition notification including a small hit RUSH or a chance mode may be executed, a card forgetting prevention notification such as a prepaid card may be executed, or a maker logo display may be displayed. It is configured to suggest the set value by configuring and changing the mode transition notification, the card forgetting prevention notification, the display mode of the maker logo display, and the display mode of the image to be displayed at the same time. You may.

If the gaming machines described in the patent documents (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-033787) and the patent documents (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902) are combined, a setting suggestion effect can be produced in a game configured to be controllable in a special state. It can be configured in a viable manner. However, it is not possible to sufficiently improve the interest of the game only by executing the setting suggestion effect in the game configured to be controllable in a special state. Therefore, for the purpose of providing the feature unit 052IW with a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the setting suggestion effect, the characteristic configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means C1) to (means C7) are shown. Is also disclosed.

(Means C1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is capable of playing a game, and is set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") having different advantages for the player. Steps S122 to S125 in the game control microcomputer 100, which is a game machine that can be set to a value and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, are executed. A portion) and a special state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is different from the advantageous state. , A portion for executing steps 052IWS2208, S2210, S2211, S2212, S2213 in a special state control means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which a game value is easily given by a special state. ) And a setting suggestion effect that can execute a setting suggestion effect (for example, a small hit winning suggestion effect) in response to the passage of a game medium (for example, a game ball) through a specific area (for example, a special winning opening). It is characterized by being provided with an execution means (for example, a portion for executing 052IWS323 and S324 in the effect control CPU 120). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect.

(Means C2) In the means C1, the advantageous state control means can control the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot gaming state) when the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. Yes, the special state control means controls a special state (for example, a small hit game state) when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display display result. A display result determining means for determining the display result of the variable display by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). (For example, a portion for executing steps 026IWS59A, S64A, S59B, S64B in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided, and a specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display display result in the determination value. The specific judgment value (for example, the judgment value for big hit judgment) and the special judgment value for deciding to derive and display the special display result as the display result of the variable display (for example, the judgment value for small hit judgment) are A setting means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values "1" to "6") that are included and have a different number of specific determination values. The portion for executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620 in the above step S21TM4530) may be provided, and the number of special determination values may be the same regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). According to such a configuration, appropriate playability can be realized.

(Means C3) In the means C1 or the means 2C, the setting suggestion effect executing means can execute the setting suggestion effect in response to the control to the special state (for example, a small hit during the high probability / second KT state). Based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening, it may be possible to execute a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize or a suggestion effect of displaying the number of prize balls). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the control to the special state.

(Means C4) In any of the means C1 to the means C3, when the means is controlled in an advantageous state and when the means is controlled in a special state, the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning). A variable means capable of controlling the ball device 17) into an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) is easy to enter and a difficult-to-enter or non-easy-to-enter state (for example, a closed state). A control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S122 to S124, S126, S127 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided, and the setting suggestion effect execution means corresponds to the fact that the variable means is controlled to be in an easy-to-access state. , The setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 17 are opened, and the game ball is won in the large winning opening or the special winning opening. Originally, it may be configured to execute a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize or a suggestion effect of displaying the number of prize balls). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the control of the variable means.

(Means C5) In any one of the means C1 to the means C4, the setting suggestion effect executing means is usually used when the control of the game state is switched (for example, at the start or end of the big hit game, from the low probability / first KT state). It is configured so that the setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display is changed in step 052IWS624) when the state (low probability / low base state) is entered. May be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the switching of the control of the gaming state.

(Means C6) In any one of the means C1 to the means C5, the setting suggestion effect executing means is the number of controls to the special state in the special state, the total of the game values given by the special state in the special state, or. Depending on the number of times the variable display is executed in the special state, the setting suggestion effect can be executed with different selection ratios (for example, the number of prize balls is 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666. Depending on the arrival of, the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F are executed at different selection ratios, or, for example, the number of small hits generated during the high probability / second KT state or the high probability / second KT state. It may be configured to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F at different selection ratios according to the number of executions of the variable display executed during the operation.) According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the number of times of control to the special state, the total number of game values, or the number of times of execution of the variable display.

(Means C7) In any one of the means C1 to the means C6, the special state control means is disadvantageous to the player as a special state as compared with the advantageous special state (for example, the second KT state) and the advantageous special state. It is possible to control the disadvantageous special state (for example, the first KT state), and the setting suggestion effect executing means plays the specific area when the game medium passes through the specific area during the advantageous special state and during the disadvantageous special state. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect with different selection ratios depending on when the medium has passed (for example, only when the game ball wins a small hit in the special winning opening during the second KT state, the suggestion at the time of the small hit winning). It may be configured to perform an effect or a prize ball number display suggestion effect). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the type of special state.

(Explanation of feature section 020SH)
Next, a gaming machine related to the feature unit 020SH will be described. The gaming machine according to the feature unit 020SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game. In this embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game will be described as an example.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 020SH includes a gaming state control means, a variable display execution means, a pre-start determination means, a hold storage means, a setting means, and an effect execution means. The game state control means, the variable display execution means, the pre-start determination means, the hold storage means, and the setting means are realized by, for example, the CPU 103 of the main board 11. The effect execution means is realized by, for example, the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12.

The game state control means controls the game state. The gaming state control means can be controlled into an advantageous state, a special state, a special state, and a non-special state. The advantageous state is an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, for example, a jackpot gaming state. The special state is a gaming state different from the advantageous state, for example, a small hit gaming state.

The special state is a state that is easily controlled by the special state, for example, the second KT state. The second KT state is a game state in which a small hit is likely to occur, and a game state in which a game ball is likely to win a prize in the special winning opening. The non-special state is a gaming state that is less likely to be controlled by the special state than the special state, and is, for example, the first KT state. The first KT state is a game state in which a small hit is likely to occur, but it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening. The frequency of small hits may be the same in comparison between the second KT state and the first KT state, but the time in which the second KT state is controlled by the small hit game (for example, opening time, etc.) may be the same. ) Is long, so it is easy to be controlled by a small hit game.

In the gaming machine according to the feature unit 020SH, the advantageous state and the special state are states in which variable display (also referred to as “variable display”) is not performed. Specifically, the state in which the variable display is not performed is a state in which identification information (big hit symbol) indicating an advantageous state is derived and displayed, and the identification information is stopped and displayed, or identification information (small) indicating a special state. The winning symbol) is derived and displayed, and the identification information is stopped and displayed. For example, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel at the same time, the state in which the variable display is not performed means that one of the symbols (special symbol) is a big hit symbol or It also includes the case where the small hit symbol is being displayed as a derivation stop display, and the other symbol is being suspended from the variable display.

Further, in the gaming machine related to the feature unit 020SH, when the effect executing means is controlled to the special state (small hit game state) in the special state (second KT state), the effect executing means can execute the special effect corresponding to the control of the special state. Is. When controlled to a special state in the special state (second KT state), the game ball is likely to win a prize in the special winning opening. Therefore, the effect executing means, for example, executes a special effect for notifying the small hit game.

On the other hand, when the effect executing means is controlled to the special state in the non-special state (first KT state), it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that is different from the special effect and suggests a content advantageous to the player. .. Even if the special state is controlled in the non-special state (first KT state), the game ball rarely wins in the special winning opening. Therefore, in the non-special state, the effect executing means does not execute the special effect.

The suggestion effect is, for example, a hold change suggestion effect based on a look-ahead determination, a set value suggestion effect, a probability change notification effect, and the like, as will be described later. However, the suggestion effect is not limited to these, and may be, for example, the maximum number of consecutive villas of the day in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the total number of variable displays, the total number of prize balls, etc. There may be. Further, the content that is advantageous to the player, which is suggested by the suggestion effect, may be any information that the player wants to know in playing the game, and for example, the content that suggests that the player is in a disadvantageous state ( For example, suggestion that it is a low setting value) is also included.

Further, in the gaming machine related to the feature unit 020SH, the effect executing means can perform variable display of decorative identification information in response to variable display of identification information. The decorative identification information is, for example, a decorative pattern. Further, when the effect executing means is controlled to the special state in the special state, the effect executing means displays the special display result as the display result of the decoration identification information. The special display result is, for example, a combination of decorative symbols indicating small hits (for example, "1, 3, 5"). When the effect executing means is controlled to the special state in the special state, the effect executing means may display a specific character indicating that the special state is controlled.

Further, when the effect executing means is controlled to the special state in the non-special state, the effect executing means displays a predetermined display result different from the special display result as the display result of the decoration identification information. The predetermined display result is, for example, a combination of decorative patterns indicating loss. The combination of lost symbols may be randomly determined for each variable display.

Further, in the gaming machine related to the feature unit 020SH, the pre-start determination means determines whether or not the display result of the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state for the variable display that has not been started yet. do. The determination made by the pre-start determination means is, for example, a look-ahead determination, specifically, a determination having the same contents as various determinations made when starting variable display, and a determination made before the various timings. be. The various determinations include, for example, a jackpot determination, a jackpot type determination, a fluctuation pattern determination, and the like.

The effect executing means can execute a suggestion effect that makes a suggestion regarding the pre-start determination means. The suggestion regarding the pre-start determination means is, for example, a suggestion of an effect performed based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination.

Further, in the gaming machine related to the feature unit 020SH, the hold storage means stores the information related to the variable display as the hold storage information. The reserved storage information is, for example, information that has been determined by the pre-start determination means, but may include information that has not been determined. The effect executing means displays the hold storage information stored in the hold storage means as a hold display. For example, the effect executing means holds and displays the reserved storage information in a display mode according to the determination result by the pre-start determination means. The display mode of the hold display includes a normal display mode and a special display mode having a higher expectation than the normal display mode.

In addition, the effect execution means can execute an action effect that acts on the hold display in the suggestion effect. Specifically, the effect effect executing means can execute an action effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display may change as the hold change suggestion effect. For example, the action effect is an effect of clarifying the hold display of the target that may change and performing some action on the hold display of the target. Specifically, the action effect is, for example, an effect in which an object hits the hold display of the target, or an effect in which lightning strikes the hold display of the target. In the gaming machine according to the feature unit 020SH, there are times when the display mode of the hold display changes and times when the display mode of the hold display does not change. An effect in which the action effect is performed and the display mode of the hold display does not change is a so-called Gase effect (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “Gase hold change suggestion effect”). It should be noted that the suggestion effect for suggesting the pre-start determination means is not limited to the hold change suggestion effect. For example, when the hold storage information determined to be a big hit is stored, or when the hold storage information determined to be a look-ahead is stored as a fluctuation pattern of the SP (super) reach that causes a loss. It may be an effect of displaying a background image or a character image suggesting that the reserved storage information having a high expectation of a big hit is stored.

Further, in the gaming machine related to the feature unit 020SH, the setting means can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. The set value is a plurality of values set corresponding to the winning probability of the big hit, and is, for example, a value set to any one of "1" to "6". The effect executing means can execute a suggestion effect (hereinafter referred to as “set value suggestion effect”) that makes a suggestion regarding the setting means. The set value suggestion effect is an effect of causing the player to guess the set value, for example, by using the background image or the character image. The set value suggestion effect may be an effect showing the set value itself. In the feature unit 020SH, the set value suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when the set value is higher than when the set value is low.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature unit 020SH, the non-special state includes a first non-special state and a second non-special state that is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than the first non-special state. The first non-special state is a non-probability change state (low probability state), for example, a low probability / first KT state. The second non-special state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), for example, a high probability / first KT state. The effect executing means can execute a common effect when it is controlled to the first non-special state and when it is controlled to the second non-special state. The common effect is, for example, an effect controlled by a common effect mode (“chance time mode” in the embodiment according to the feature unit 020SH). The effect mode is, for example, an effect in which a specific effect image different from the usual one, a specific BGM, or the like is executed over one or a plurality of variable displays. The effect image referred to here is, for example, a background image, a character image, a hold image, an active display image, an interface image, a decorative pattern image of a display mode, and the like.

Further, the suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the second non-special state is controlled (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “probability change suggestion effect”). The probabilistic suggestion effect is, for example, an effect of displaying an image (for example, a specific background image, a specific character image, a character image, etc.) suggesting that the image is controlled to the second non-special state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature unit 020SH, the effect executing means can execute a plurality of types of suggestive effects having different modes as the suggestive effects. As described above, the plurality of types of suggestion effects include a hold change suggestion effect, a set value suggestion effect, and a probability change suggestion effect. In addition, there are a plurality of types of suggestion effects for each suggestion effect. For example, in the case of a hold change suggestion effect, there may be an effect in which the hold display is likely to change and an effect in which the hold display is unlikely to change. Further, for example, in the case of the setting value suggestion effect, there are modes suggesting that there is a high possibility that the setting is high, and modes that suggest that there is a high possibility that the setting is low. Further, in the case of the probabilistic change suggestion effect, there are modes suggesting that the probability of being controlled to the probabilistic state is high, and modes suggesting that the possibility of being controlled to the probabilistic state is low.

The advantage of the content suggested to the player differs depending on which type of suggestion effect is executed in the feature unit 020SH. For example, in the set value suggestion effect, when the set value suggestion effect suggesting that the setting is high is executed, the set value suggestion effect suggesting that the setting is likely to be low is performed. It is more advantageous for the player than the case where it is broken. Further, for example, in the probabilistic suggestion effect, when the probabilistic suggestion effect suggesting that the probabilistic state is likely to be controlled is executed, it is suggested that the probability of being controlled to the probabilistic state is low. It is more advantageous for the player than the case where the probabilistic change suggestion effect of the aspect is executed.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature unit 020SH, the variable display executing means can execute the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel. The gaming machine according to the feature unit 020SH is provided with a first variable winning means. The first variable winning means is, for example, a variable winning ball device 6B (see FIG. 1) having a second starting winning opening. The first variable winning means can be changed into a first state (open state) in which the game medium easily passes through the starting area and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium does not easily pass through the starting area.

The gaming state control means can control the first variable winning means to a predetermined state in which the first variable winning means is likely to change to the first state. The predetermined state is, for example, a non-special state, specifically, a first KT state (a game state in which a small hit game in which a game ball hardly wins is repeatedly executed). The effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect when it is controlled to a special state in a predetermined state.

Further, the gaming machine according to the feature unit 020SH is provided with a second variable winning means. The second variable winning means is, for example, a special variable winning ball device 17 (see FIG. 1) having a special winning opening for small hits. The second variable winning means can be changed into a winning easy state (open state) in which the game ball is easy to win and a winning difficult state (closed state) in which the game ball is difficult to win. The second variable winning means can be changed to a winning easy state in a special state (small hit game state). The effect executing means executes the suggestion effect in response to the change of the second variable winning means to the winning easy state. Specifically, for example, the effect executing means executes the suggestion effect in accordance with the opening timing of the second variable winning means.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the feature unit 020SH, when the effect executing means is controlled to the special state (small hit) in the special state (for example, the second KT state), the gaming medium passes through the special area. It is possible to execute a predetermined effect corresponding to the passage of a special area of the game medium. Specifically, the special region is a region (for example, a V region or a discharge region) through which the game ball winning the special variable winning device 7 passes. The game ball that has passed through the special area is detected by the second count switch 24 provided in the special winning opening. As a result, the prize ball is paid out. The predetermined effect is, for example, an effect showing a prize in the special variable winning device 7, or an effect of adding the number of prize balls paid out by the prize.

Further, when the effect executing means is controlled to the special state in the non-special state (for example, the first KT state), the effect executing means does not execute the predetermined effect regardless of whether or not the game medium has passed through the special area. Specifically, when the effect executing means is controlled to the special state in the non-special state, the effect executing means executes the suggestion effect without executing the predetermined effect.

(Regarding the game state and transition of the production mode after the big hit game in the feature unit 020SH)
Next, with reference to FIG. 11-1, the transition of the gaming state after the big hit game in the feature unit 020SH and the transition of the effect mode according to the gaming state will be described. FIG. 11-1 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the game state and the effect mode after the big hit game according to the feature unit 020SH. As shown in FIG. 11-1, in the feature unit 020SH, in the normal state (low probability / low base state), the normal mode is controlled. Further, in the high probability / low base state, it is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode. Further, in the high probability / high base state and the low probability / high base state, the channel time mode is controlled. That is, in the high probability / high base state and the low probability / high base state, a common effect is executed.

Further, as for the effect during the big hit game, a common effect may be executed depending on whether the big hit game based on the 6R probability variation big hit is executed or the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit is executed. That is, it is sufficient that the combination of the common decorative symbols is stopped and displayed for the 6R probability variation jackpot and the 6R normal jackpot, and the common jackpot effect is executed even during each jackpot game. As a result, whether the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot was executed (whether it is controlled to the high probability / high base state) or the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot was executed (to the low probability / high base state). Is it controlled?) Can be prevented from being discriminated by the player.

In the feature unit 020SH, in the KT state (first KT state and second KT state), the normal jackpot determined in the jackpot type determination is not determined to be a 6R normal jackpot in principle, but is determined to be a 2R normal jackpot. Therefore, when the 2R jackpot game is executed in the KT state, the player knows that the transition has been made to the low probability / high base state or that the low probability / high base state has been continued. Therefore, when the jackpot game based on the 2R normal jackpot is executed in the KT state, an effect of notifying the low probability / high base state (a separately prepared jackpot effect or effect mode) may be executed.

Further, when the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot is executed in the KT state, the player knows that the transition to the high probability / high base state or the continuation of the high probability / high base state has been continued. .. Therefore, when the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot is executed in the KT state, an effect of notifying the high probability / high base state (a separately prepared jackpot effect or effect mode) may be executed. In other words, the chance time mode may be controlled only in the so-called first hit case, that is, the transition from the normal state to the high probability / high base state or the transition to the low probability / high base state. It may be limited to the case where it is done.

In the jackpot type determination, the 6R normal jackpot may be determined instead of being determined as a 2R normal jackpot. As a result, in the KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot is executed and the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot is executed. Can be prevented from being determined by the player (whether it is controlled to a high probability / high base state or controlled to a low probability / high base state).

(An example of the effect mode setting process related to the feature unit 020SH)
Next, an example of the effect mode setting process related to the feature unit 020SH will be described with reference to FIG. 11-2. FIG. 11-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect mode setting process related to the feature unit 020SH. The effect mode setting process is a process executed in the special figure hit wait process of S173 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 11-2, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received (step 020SHS11). When the jackpot start designation command (first jackpot start designation command or second jackpot start designation command) is received (step 020SHS11: YES), that is, when a jackpot occurs, the effect control CPU 120 determines the probability variation jackpot. (Step 020SHS12). When it is not a probabilistic jackpot (step 020SHS12: NO), that is, when it is a 2R normal jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines to control the effect mode to the chance time mode (step 020SHS14). Ends a series of processes. In the case of a 2R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 may determine an effect mode (separately prepared effect mode) for notifying a low probability / high base state.

On the other hand, in step 020SHS12, when it is a probability variation jackpot (step 020SHS12: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 020SHS13). In the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 020SHS13: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines to control the effect mode to the chance time mode by shifting to step 020SHS14. That is, the effect control CPU 120 executes a common effect (chance mode) in the case of a normal jackpot and the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot. On the other hand, when it is not a 6R probability variation big hit (step 020SHS13: NO), the effect control CPU 120 decides to control the effect mode to the small hit RUSH mode (step 020SHS15), and ends a series of processes.

When the big hit start designation command is not received in step 020SHS11 (step 020SHS11: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the small hit start designation command is received (step 020SHS16). When the small hit start designation command is received (step 020SHS16: YES), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. On the other hand, when the small hit start designation command has not been received (step 020SHS16: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed (step 020SHS17). In step 020SHS17, the effect control CPU 120 does not receive the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, and the reception waiting time of the command (corresponding to the “predetermined period” in step 020SHS17). Determine if it has passed.

If the predetermined period has not elapsed in step 020SHS17 (step 020SHS17: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. When the predetermined period has elapsed (step 020SHS17: YES), that is, when it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing", the effect control CPU 120 has the value of the effect high base number counter "0". (Step 020SHS18). When the value of the effect high base number counter is "0" (step 020SHS18: YES), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. When the value of the effect high base count counter is not "0" (step 020SHS18: NO), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts the value of the effect high base count counter by "1" (step 020SHS19).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the effect high base number counter has become “0” (step 020SHS20). When the value of the effect high base number counter is not "0" (step 020SHS20: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. On the other hand, when the value of the high-base count counter for effect becomes "0" (step 020SHS20: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines to control the effect mode to the normal mode (step 020SHS21), and a series of series. End the process.

In the effect mode setting process shown in FIG. 11-2, when the big hit game is executed and then controlled to the high probability / high base state or the low probability / high base state by the process of steps 020SHS12 to 14, it is common. It is controlled by the chance time mode, which is a production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from determining whether the control is in the high probability / high base state or in the low probability / high base state.

(An example of variable display compatible display control processing related to feature unit 020SH)
Next, an example of the variable display compatible display (hold display and active display) control process related to the feature unit 020SH will be described with reference to FIG. 11-3. FIG. 11-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display compatible display control process according to the feature unit 020SH. The variable display compatible display control process is a process executed in the look-ahead notice setting process of S161 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the start winning designation command has been received (step 020SHS31). When the start prize designation command (first valid start prize designation command or second valid start prize designation command) has not been received (step 020SHS31: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. When the start prize designation command is received (step 020SHS31: YES), the initial color which is the display mode at the start of the hold display is determined (step 020SHS32), and the variable display compatible display (hold display and active display) is performed. The final color, which is the final display mode of the above, is determined (step 020SHS33). In the determination of the initial color and the determination of the final color, the initial color determination table and the final color determination table described below are used.

(Initial color determination table and final color determination table for variable display compatible display)
FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial color determination table and a final color determination table for variable display compatible display. In FIGS. 11-4, (A) shows an initial color determination table, and (B) shows a final color determination table. In (A), the display mode indicates a display mode when starting variable display compatible display (hold display). Further, in (B), the display mode indicates the display mode of the variable display compatible display (active display) to be finally displayed.

In the feature unit 020SH, the display mode of the variable display compatible display is such that the variable display is being executed, the variable display is started (so-called hold shift), or the small hit game is being executed in the chance time mode. It can change at the timing of change. In (A) and (B), four types of display modes are shown: "red", "green", "blue", and "ash". The display mode of "ash" is a normal display mode. Further, the display modes of "red", "green", and "blue" are special display modes different from the normal display modes.

Further, in (A) and (B), the fluctuation pattern indicates any one of "big hit", "SP (super) reach loss", and "other loss". Here, in the feature unit 020SH, the production mainly during the chance time mode (high probability / high base state or low probability / high base state) will be described. Therefore, in FIG. 11-4, the high probability / high base state is shown. The variation patterns used in the state or the low probability / high base state (variation patterns shown in FIGS. 10-8 (E) and 10-9 (H)) will be described as an example.

The fluctuation pattern of the "big hit" is, for example, the second fluctuation patterns # 13 and # 28 in which the fluctuation time is 2 minutes. In the second fluctuation patterns # 13 and # 28, the decorative pattern indicating the big hit is stopped and displayed after the SP reach. The fluctuation pattern of "SP reach loss" is, for example, the second fluctuation pattern # 09, # 12, # 24, # 27 in which the fluctuation time is 2 minutes. In the second fluctuation pattern # 09, # 12, # 24, # 27, the decorative pattern indicating the loss is stopped and displayed after the SP reach. The fluctuation pattern of "other loss" is, for example, the second fluctuation pattern # 07, # 08, # 22, # 23 having a fluctuation time of 1 second or 5 seconds.

Further, the "other loss" fluctuation pattern is the second fluctuation pattern # 10, # 11, # 25, #, which is selected when the fluctuation time is 1 second or 5 seconds and it is determined to be a small hit. 26 is included. In the second fluctuation pattern # 07, # 08, # 22, # 23 and the second fluctuation pattern # 10, # 11, # 25, # 26 in which the fluctuation time is 1 second or 5 seconds, the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed. The mode does not change to the mode of SP reach, and the definite decorative symbol of the combination of losses is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the second fluctuation pattern # 07, # 08, # 22, # 23 and the second fluctuation pattern # 10, # 11, # 25, # 26 in which the fluctuation time is 1 second or 5 seconds, the normal reach effect is produced. It may be performed and the definite decorative symbol of the combination of the loss in the reach mode may be stopped and displayed.

As shown in (B), in the case of the fluctuation pattern of "big hit", "red" is most likely to be selected, then "green" is most likely to be selected, and then "blue" is most likely to be selected as the final color display mode. , "Ash" is the most difficult to select. Further, as shown in (B), in the case of the fluctuation pattern of "SP reach loss", "green" is most likely to be selected, then "red" is most likely to be selected, and then "blue" is the final color display mode. It is easy to select, and "ash" is the most difficult to select. Further, as shown in (B), in the case of the variation pattern of "other loss", "ash" is most likely to be selected, then "blue" is most likely to be selected, and then "green" as the final color display mode. Is easy to select, and "red" is the most difficult to select. Therefore, when the jackpot expectation degree of the display mode is expressed by an inequality sign, it is "red"> "green"> "blue"> "ash".

On the other hand, as shown in (A), in any variation pattern, "ash" is most likely to be selected, then "blue" is most likely to be selected, and then "green" is selected as the initial color display mode. It is easy to do, and "red" is the most difficult to select. This makes it possible to gradually change from a display mode with a low expectation to a display mode with a high expectation at the change timing of the display mode. Further, when comparing (A) and (B) with respect to the fluctuation pattern of "other loss", it is easier to select the display mode ("blue" and "green") with higher expectation in (B). ing. As a result, even in the case of the fluctuation pattern of "other loss", it is possible to gradually change from the display mode with low expectation to the display mode with high expectation. Further, in the feature unit 020SH, the display mode is changed to a display mode with a low degree of expectation, that is, the so-called effect is prevented from falling.

Returning to FIG. 11-3, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial color and the final color, the determined initial color and the expected degree of the display mode of the final color are compared, and the final color is higher than the expected degree of the display mode of the initial color. It is determined whether or not the degree of expectation of the color display mode is high (step 020SHS34). When the degree of expectation indicated by the display mode of the final color is lower than the degree of expectation indicated by the display mode of the initial color (step 020SHS34: NO), the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display compatible display according to the display mode of the initial color. (Step 020SHS37). If the expectation level indicated by the final color display mode is lower than the expectation level indicated by the initial color display mode, and if a change effect is performed to change the display mode of the variable display compatible display, the effect is reduced. Therefore, by shifting to step 020SHS37, the change effect is not performed.

On the other hand, in step 020SHS34, when the expectation degree indicated by the final color display mode is higher than the expectation degree indicated by the initial color display mode (step 020SHS34: YES), the effect control CPU 120 displays the final color display mode. , Store in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 122 (step 020SHS35).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets a change flag indicating that a change effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display is performed (step 020SHS36). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display compatible display (hold display) according to the display mode of the initial color (step 020SHS37), and ends a series of processes.

(An example of the suggestion effect execution process performed by the effect control CPU 120 when controlled to the small hit game state)
Next, an example of the suggestion effect execution process performed by the effect control CPU 120 when the small hit game state is controlled will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-5 and 11-6. 11-5 and 11-6 are flowcharts showing an example of the suggestion effect execution process performed by the effect control CPU 120 when the small hit game state is controlled. The suggestion effect execution process shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-6 is a process executed in the special figure hit wait process of S173 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 11-5, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 020SHS51). When the small hit start designation command has not been received (step 020SHS51: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. When the small hit start designation command is received (step 020SHS51: YES), it is determined whether or not the effect mode is controlled to the chance time mode (first KT state) (step 020SHS52). When the effect mode is controlled to the chance time mode (step 020SHS52: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode (step 020SHS53).

When the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode (step 020SHS53: YES), the effect control CPU 120 is set to execute the effect (effect for notifying the small hit) according to the small hit RUSH mode. (Step 020SHS54), a series of processes is terminated. On the other hand, when the effect mode is not controlled to the small hit RUSH mode (step 020SHS53: NO), that is, when the effect mode is controlled to the normal mode, the effect control CPU 120 has an effect (loss) according to the normal mode. Direction: Make a setting (step 020SHS55) to execute (continuously display the decorative pattern stopped and displayed by the combination of loss), and end a series of processing.

In step 020SHS52, when the effect mode is controlled to the chance time mode (step 020SHS52: YES), the effect control CPU 120 is set with a change flag indicating that a change effect for changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display is performed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (step 020SHS56). When the change flag is not set (step 020SHS56: NO), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 020SHS63. On the other hand, when the change flag is set (step 020SHS56: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display mode of the hold display at the present time is the final color (step 020SHS57).

When the display mode of the hold display at the present time is the final color (step 020SHS57: YES), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 020SHS63. On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold display at the present time is not the final color (step 020SHS57: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of the hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS58). In determining the presence or absence of the hold change suggestion effect, the hold change suggestion effect determination table described below is used.

FIG. 11-7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a determination table for various suggestion effects. FIG. 11-7 (A) shows a pending change suggestion effect determination table. The hold change suggestion effect determination table is a table for determining either "with hold change suggestion effect" or "without hold change suggestion effect". "With hold change suggestion effect" indicates that after the hold change suggestion effect is performed (for example, at the start of the next variable display), a series of change effects in which the display mode of the hold display changes is performed. "No hold change suggestion effect" indicates that the hold change suggestion effect is not performed and the display mode of the hold display does not change (change effect is not performed).

In FIG. 11-7 (A), the determination ratio of "with pending change suggestion effect" is higher than the determination ratio of "without pending change suggestion effect". Therefore, in the small hit game state, when the hold display has not changed to the display mode of the final color, the hold change suggestion effect is likely to be performed. It should be noted that the display mode of the hold display is changed to a display mode in which the display mode of the hold display being displayed shows a higher expectation level by performing the hold change suggestion effect. Specifically, for example, if the display mode of the hold display at the present time is "gray", it changes to "blue", and if the display mode of the hold display at the present time is "blue", it changes to "green". I will do it.

The display mode of the hold display after the change is not limited to the display mode in which the expectation level is increased by one level, but may be a display mode in which the expectation level is increased by two levels or a display mode in which the expectation level is increased by three levels. good. Specifically, the display mode for changing the display mode of the hold display may be any display mode that is less than or equal to the expected degree indicated by the final color, and for example, when there are a plurality of display modes up to the display mode of the final color. (For example, when the initial color is "gray" and the final color is "red"), one of multiple display modes ("blue", "green", "red") is determined. You may try to do it.

Further, in the embodiment related to the feature unit 020SH, whether or not to perform a change effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display is determined each time, for example, when the variable display or the small hit game is executed. I decided to do it, but it is not limited to this. For example, a scenario (story) indicating the timing of performing the change effect up to the final color may be determined in advance, and whether or not the change effect is performed may be determined by referring to the scenario. In addition, by including the transition of the display mode in the scenario, whether or not to perform the change effect and the color after the change may be determined by referring to the scenario.

Returning to FIG. 11-5, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS59). When the hold change suggestion effect is not performed (step 020SHS59: NO), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 020SHS63. On the other hand, when performing the hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS59: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display mode after the change of the hold display is the final color (step 020SHS60). Specifically, in step 020SHS60, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the display mode of the final color stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 122, and whether or not the display mode of the hold display after the change is the final color. Judge.

When the display mode of the hold display after the change is not the final color (step 020SHS60: NO), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 020SHS62. On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold display after the change is the final color (step 020SHS60: YES), the effect control CPU 120 resets the change flag (step 020SHS61). Then, the effect control CPU 120 makes a setting for executing the hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS62), and ends a series of processes. An example of the pending change suggestion effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 11-10, but it is a series of effects including a first fanning effect, a second fanning effect, and an action effect.

In FIG. 11-6, in step 020SHS64, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of the set value suggestion effect (step 020SHS63). In determining the presence or absence of the set value suggestion effect, the set value suggestion effect determination table described below is used.

FIG. 11-7 (B) shows a set value suggestion effect determination table. The set value suggestion effect determination table is a table for determining the presence / absence of the set value suggestion effect and the type of the set value suggestion effect for each set value. In FIG. 11-7 (B), the "set value" indicates any of "1" to "6".

In addition, the "type" of the setting value suggestion effect is "odd number setting suggestion" which suggests that the setting value is an odd number setting, "even number setting suggestion" which suggests that the setting value is an even number setting, and the setting value. Shows three types, "suggestion of set value 4 or more", which suggests that is "4" or more. The effect of "odd number setting suggestion" is an effect that can be determined when the set value is an odd number (any of "1", "3", and "5"). The effect of "even number setting suggestion" is an effect that can be determined when the set value is an even number (any of "2", "4", and "6"). The effect of "suggesting a set value of 4 or more" is an effect that can be determined when the set value is 4 or more (any of "4", "5", and "6").

In addition, the setting value suggestion effect differs depending on the type, for example, the background image is different. The background image is, for example, an image showing the morning in the case of the "odd number setting suggestion" effect, and an image showing the daytime in the case of the "even number setting suggestion" effect, and is an effect of the "setting value 4 or more suggestion" effect. If so, it is an image showing the night.

As shown in the set value suggestion effect determination table, "no set value suggestion effect" is determined at the highest ratio regardless of whether the "set value" is "1" to "6". As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting value suggestion effect from being performed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from easily guessing the set value.

Further, the effect of the "odd number setting suggestion" is determined at a higher rate as the "setting value" becomes higher as "1", "3", and "5". Therefore, it can be suggested that there is a high possibility that the set value is "5" by producing the "odd number setting suggestion" effect. Similarly, the effect of "even number setting suggestion" is determined at a higher rate as the "set value" becomes higher as "2", "4", and "6". Therefore, it can be suggested that there is a high possibility that the set value is "6" by producing the "even number setting suggestion" effect. Further, the effect of "suggesting a set value of 4 or more" is determined at a higher rate as the "set value" becomes higher as "4", "5", and "6". Therefore, it can be suggested that there is a high possibility that the set value is "6" by performing the effect of "suggesting a set value of 4 or more".

Returning to FIG. 11-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the set value suggestion effect as a result of determining the presence / absence of the set value suggestion effect in step 020SHS63 (step 020SHS64). When performing the set value suggestion effect (step 020SHS64: YES), the effect control CPU 120 makes a setting for executing the set value suggestion effect (step 020SHS65), and ends a series of processes. An example of the set value suggestion effect will be described later with reference to FIGS. 11-12, but the set value suggestion effect is a series of effects including the first fanning effect and the second fanning effect. On the other hand, when the set value suggestion effect is not performed (step 020SHS64: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the probabilistic incitement effect (step 020SHS66). In determining the presence or absence of the probabilistic effect, the probabilistic effect determination table described below is used.

FIG. 11-7 (C) shows a probability change suggestion effect determination table. The probability change suggestion effect determination table is a table for determining the presence / absence of the probability change suggestion effect and the type of the probability change suggestion effect for each of the high probability state and the low probability state. In FIG. 11-7 (C), the "probability state" is a "high probability" which is a probabilistic state (high probability / high base state) and a "low probability change" which is a non-probability state (low probability / high base state). Indicates one of. In addition, the types of probabilistic suggestion effects are "suggesting high probability", which suggests that there is a high possibility of being in a high probability state, and "suggesting high probability", which suggests that there is a high probability of being in a high probability state. There are three types, "suggesting a possibility" that suggests "possible" and "suggesting a small possibility" that suggests that the possibility of being in a high probability state is lower than "suggesting a possibility".

As shown in the probability change suggestion effect determination table, "no probability change suggestion effect" is determined at the highest ratio regardless of whether the "probability state" is "high probability" or "low probability". This makes it possible to prevent the probability change suggestion effect from being performed frequently, and makes it difficult for the player to easily guess whether the player is controlled to the high probability state or the low probability state. be able to.

In addition, as shown in the probability change suggestion effect determination table, when the "probability state" is "high probability", the rate at which "no probability change suggestion effect" is determined is lower than in the case of "low probability". That is, the rate at which any kind of probabilistic suggestion effect is determined is high. As a result, it can be suggested that there is a high possibility that the probability change state is controlled by the probability change suggestion effect itself.

In addition, when the "probability state" is "high probability", the effect of "suggesting high possibility" is most likely to be determined, followed by the effect of "suggesting medium possibility", which suggests "small possibility". Is the most difficult to determine. In addition, when the "probability state" is "low probability", the effect of "suggesting a small possibility" is most likely to be determined, followed by the effect of "suggesting a medium possibility", which suggests a "high possibility". Is the most difficult to determine. As a result, it can be suggested that there is a high possibility that the state is controlled to a high probability state when the effect of "suggesting a high probability" is performed. Further, when the effect of "suggesting the possibility" is performed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the control is in the high probability state or the low probability state. In addition, it can be suggested that there is a high possibility that the state is controlled to a low probability state when the effect of "suggesting a small probability" is performed.

Returning to FIG. 11-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the probabilistic suggestion effect as a result of determining the presence or absence of the probabilistic suggestion effect in step 020SHS66 (step 020SHS67). When performing the probability change suggestion effect (step 020SHS68: YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets for executing the probability change suggestion effect (step 020SHS69), and ends a series of processes. The probability change suggestion effect will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 11-13, but is a series of effects including the first fanning effect and the second fanning effect. On the other hand, when the probability change suggestion effect is not performed (step 020SHS68: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the final color of the hold storage during the hold display is all determined to be gray (step 020SHS69). Specifically, in step 020SHS69, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the display mode of the final color of each reserved storage stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 122, so that the final color of the reserved storage being displayed can be changed. Judge whether all are decided to be gray.

When the final color of the hold storage during the hold display is not all determined to be gray (step 020SHS69: NO), that is, at least one of the hold memories during the hold display is determined to be the special display mode. If so, the effect control CPU 120 sets for executing the first fanning effect (see (C) in FIG. 11-10) (step 020SHS73), and ends a series of processes. On the other hand, when the final color of the hold storage during the hold display is all determined to be gray (step 020SHS69: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of the Gase hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS70). The Gase hold change suggestion effect is a hold change suggestion effect that is executed even though the display mode of the hold display does not change, and as a result, the hold change suggestion effect is a series of effects that becomes the Gase effect. In determining the presence or absence of the Gase hold change suggestion effect, the Gase hold change suggestion effect determination table described below is used.

FIG. 11-7 (D) shows a Gase hold change suggestion effect determination table. The Gase hold change suggestion effect determination table is a table for determining either "with Gase hold change suggestion effect" or "without Gase hold change suggestion effect". "Gase hold change suggestion effect" indicates that the display mode of the hold display does not change after the hold change suggestion effect is performed (for example, at the start of the next variable display). "No hold change suggestion effect" indicates that the hold change suggestion effect is not performed and the display mode of the hold display does not change (change effect is not performed).

The decision rate of "with Gase hold change suggestion effect" is higher than the decision rate of "without Gase hold change suggestion effect". Therefore, in the small hit game state, it is possible to make the production lively by the effect of suggesting a change on hold.

In the feature unit 020SH, the Gase hold change suggestion effect is executed as the Gase effect, but the Gase setting value suggestion effect that is not performed by pretending to be the set value suggestion effect may be executed. It may be possible to execute a suggestion effect that does not pretend to be a suggestion effect.

Returning to FIG. 11-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines in step 020SHS70 whether or not to perform the Gase hold change suggestion effect, and as a result, determines whether or not to perform the Gase hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS71). When performing the Gase hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS71: YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets for executing the Gase hold change suggestion effect (step 020SHS72), and ends a series of processes. The Gase hold change suggestion effect will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 11-11, but is a series of effects including a first fanning effect, a second fanning effect, and an action effect. On the other hand, when the Gase hold change suggestion effect is not performed (step 020SHS71: NO), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 020SHS74.

By the above-mentioned processing, in the small hit game state in the chance time mode (high probability / high base state or low probability / high base state), one of the pending change suggestion effect, the set value suggestion effect, and the probability change suggestion effect. It becomes possible to execute the suggestion effect of.

(An example of the change effect execution process of the variable display compatible display performed by the effect control CPU 120 during the variable display)
Next, an example of the change effect execution process of the variable display compatible display performed by the effect control CPU 120 during the variable display will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-8. FIG. 11-8 is a flowchart showing an example of a change effect execution process of the variable display compatible display performed by the effect control CPU 120 during the variable display. The variable display compatible display change effect execution process shown in FIG. 11-8 is a process executed in the variable display start wait process of S171 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.

In FIG. 11-8, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a change flag indicating that a change effect for changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display is set is set (step 020SHS101). When the change flag is not set (step 020SHS101: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. On the other hand, when the change flag is set (step 020SHS101: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display mode of the variable display compatible display at the present time is the final color (step 020SHS102).

When the display mode of the variable display compatible display at the present time is the final color (step 020SHS102: YES), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. On the other hand, when the display mode of the variable display compatible display at the present time is not the final color (step 020SHS102: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the target variable display compatible display is the active display (step). 020SHS103). When the target variable display compatible display is the active display (step 020SHS103: YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the active display to forcibly execute the final color display mode (step 020SHS107). ).

Here, in step 020SHS107, the display mode of the active display changes from the current display mode to the display mode of the final color, so that the display mode may change to a display mode in which the degree of expectation is one step higher. It may change to a display mode in which the degree is increased by two or more steps. On the other hand, when the target variable display compatible display is not the active display (step 020SHS103: NO), it is determined whether or not to change the display mode of the hold display (step 020SHS104). The rate for determining to change the display mode of the hold display is, for example, the decision rate for changing the hold display with the hold change suggestion effect during the small hit game (hold change suggestion shown in FIG. 11-7 (A)). The ratio is the same as the ratio for determining the effect: 70/100), but may be different.

Then, when the effect control CPU 120 does not change the display mode of the hold display as a result of the determination in step 020SHS104 (step 020SHS105: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold display is changed (step 020SHS105: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display mode after the change of the hold display is the final color (step 020SHS106). Specifically, in step 020SHS106, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the display mode of the final color stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 122, and whether or not the display mode of the hold display after the change is the final color. Judge.

When the display mode of the hold display after the change is the final color (step 020SHS106: YES), the hold display is set to execute the change effect for changing to the display mode of the final color (step 020SHS107). Then, the effect control CPU 120 resets the change flag (step 020SHS108), and ends a series of processes. In step 020SHS106, when the display mode of the hold display after the change is not the final color (step 020SHS106: NO), the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the hold display to a display mode with a higher expectation. Is set to be executed (step 020SHS109), and a series of processes is completed.

It should be noted that the change effect of changing the display mode of the hold display during the variable display and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display accompanied by the hold change suggestion effect during the small hit game are different effects. Specifically, in the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display during the variable display, the hold change suggestion effect is not performed.

(An example of the transition of the production screen in the small hit RUSH mode)
Next, an example of the transition of the effect screen in the small hit RUSH mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-9. Note that FIG. 11-9 shows the transition of the effect screen when the small hit game is executed during the small hit RUSH mode (high probability / in the second KT state). FIG. 11-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the effect screen in the small hit RUSH mode.

FIG. 11-9 (A) shows a variable display in the small hit RUSH mode. Specifically, the decorative symbol 020SH200 and the small symbol 020SH201 are variably displayed on the image display device 5. In the small hit RUSH mode, only the small symbol 020SH201 may be displayed without displaying the decorative symbol 020SH200. In displaying the screen shown in (A), the effect control CPU 120 has a display result and a variation pattern (for example, the second variation pattern # 32 in FIG. 10-9) specified by the effect control command received from the main board 11. ) And the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect and various advance notice effects, and the execution of various effects such as the effect mode according to the game state. The presence / absence, its mode, the execution start timing, etc. are determined, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed based on the determination result.

Further, in (A), the total prize ball number display 020SH204 is displayed. The total prize ball number display 020SH204 indicates the total prize ball number in the consecutive chan including the small hit RUSH mode. Further, in (A), a notification image including the character "right-handed" is displayed as a notification image corresponding to the right-handed notification in the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5. It should be noted that the broadcast image may include an image showing an arrow pointing to the right in order to encourage right-handed striking. Further, in FIG. 11-9, the hold display and the active display are not displayed, but these may be displayed. In the screen shown in (A), when the variable display stop timing is reached, the screen transitions to the screen (B).

FIG. 11-9 (B) shows a screen when the fluctuation is stopped when it is determined that the small hit is a small hit during the small hit RUSH mode. Specifically, the small hit notification image 020SH202 indicating a small hit is displayed on the image display device 5, and the small symbol 020SH201 is stopped at a definite symbol "1, 3, 5" which is a combination indicating a small hit game. It is displayed. In displaying the screen shown in (B), the effect control CPU 120 has read, for example, an exit code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol 020SH200 (and the small symbol 020SH201) from the effect control pattern, or the main In response to receiving a command from the board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol 020SH200 should be stopped and displayed, the fixed decorative symbol 020SH200, which is the display result of the decorative symbol 020SH200, is stopped and displayed. In (B), when the symbol confirmation period elapses, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (C).

FIG. 11-9 (C) shows a screen during the small hit game in the small hit determination in the small hit RUSH mode. Specifically, in the small hit game state, when there is a prize in the special winning opening, the image display device 5 displays a winning effect image 020SH203 indicating the number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls). Further, the total prize ball number display 020SH204 shows a number added by 10 balls as compared with (B) of FIG. 11-9.

FIG. 11-9 (D) shows a screen at the time of winning a prize in the special winning opening of the second ball during the small hit game. When there is a prize in the special winning opening of the second ball in the small hit game state, the image display device 5 further displays a winning effect image 020SH203 (two images in total) indicating the number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls). Is displayed. Further, the total prize ball number display 020SH204 shows a number added by 10 balls as compared with (C) of FIG. 11-9. The same applies to the third and subsequent balls, and when there is a prize in the special winning opening, the winning effect image 020SH203 is additionally displayed on the image display device 5.

In displaying the screens shown in (C) and (D), if the effect control CPU 120 receives the special winning opening winning designation command (effect control command), the second KT state flag is set (that is,). , If it is in the high probability / second KT state), 10 is added to the value of the prize ball counter, and the winning effect image 020SH203 is displayed on the image display device 5. When the small hit game is completed, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (E), and the next variable display is started.

As shown in FIG. 11-9, when it is determined to execute the small hit game in the small hit determination in the small hit RUSH mode, the small hit notification image 020SH202 and the small symbol 020SH201 showing the small hit are stopped and displayed. During the small hit game, the winning effect image 020SH203 is displayed according to the winning of the special winning opening. That is, in the high probability / second KT state, when the small hit gaming state is controlled, the small hit notification image 020SH202, the small symbol 020SH201, and the winning effect image 020SH203 corresponding to the control of the small hit gaming state are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the small hit game in the small hit RUSH mode.

(An example of the transition of the suggestion effect in the chance time mode)
Next, an example of the suggestion effect in the chance time mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-10 to 11-13. In addition, in FIGS. 11-10 to 11-13, the transition of the effect screen when the small hit game is executed during the chance time mode (high probability / first KT state or low probability / first KT state) is shown. show. In the description of FIGS. 11-10 to 11-13, the same contents as those described with reference to FIGS. 11-9 are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

(An example of the transition of the effect that changes the display mode of the hold display during the chance time mode)
FIG. 11-10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display during the chance time mode. FIG. 11-11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a transition of the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display during the chance time mode. 11-10 and 11-11 (A) to (E) show similar screens.

11-10 and 11-11 (A) show variable display during the chance time mode. Specifically, the decorative symbol 020SH200 and the small symbol 020SH201 are variably displayed on the image display device 5. Further, the image display device 5 displays an active display 020SH205 and a hold display 020SH206 as variable display compatible displays. In the chance time mode, only the small symbol 020SH201 may be displayed without displaying the decorative symbol 020SH200. In (A), the variable display compatible display all show a normal display mode (for example, “ash”).

In displaying the screen shown in (A), the effect control CPU 120 has a display result and a variation pattern (for example, the second variation pattern # 11 in FIG. 10-8) specified by the effect control command received from the main board 11. , Or, based on the second variation pattern # 26) in FIG. 10-9 and the gaming state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed. Further, in displaying the variable display compatible display, the effect control CPU 120 determines, for example, the display mode of the variable display compatible display based on the determination result of the look-ahead notice effect, and is variable in the display mode according to the result of the determination. Display compatible display is displayed. In the screen shown in (A), when the variable display stop timing is reached, the screen transitions to the screen (B).

11-10 and 11-11 (B) show a screen at the time of suspension of fluctuation when it is determined that the small hit is a small hit in the small hit determination in the chance time mode. Specifically, although the image display device 5 is determined to be a small hit, a prize ball cannot be expected. Therefore, both the decorative symbol 020SH200 and the small hit notification image 020SH202 are symbols showing a combination of loss. The stop display is displayed at, and the small hit notification image 020SH202 (see (B) in FIG. 11-10) is not displayed. In (B), when the symbol confirmation period elapses, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (C).

11-10 and 11-11 (C) show a screen during a small hit game in the chance time mode (fanning effect 1: step 1). Specifically, in the small hit game state in the chance time mode, the first fanning effect image 020SH211 suggesting that the suggestion effect (hold change suggestion effect, set value suggestion effect, and probability change suggestion effect) may be performed. Is displayed. The first fanning effect image 020SH211 is, for example, an image showing that a character appears. Further, the decorative symbol 020SH200 is erased, and the small hit notification image 020SH202 is stopped and displayed as it is with a symbol indicating a combination of loss. In the small hit game state in the chance time mode, the special winning opening is rarely won. Further, even if the special winning opening is won in the small hit game state in the chance time mode, the winning effect image 020SH203 shown in FIG. 11-9 (C) is not displayed.

11-10 and 11-11 (D) show a screen during a small hit game in the chance time mode (fanning effect 2: step 2). Specifically, the image display device 5 can perform a suggestion effect (one of a hold change suggestion effect, a set value suggestion effect, and a probability change suggestion effect) rather than the fanning effect 1 of (C). The second fanning effect image 020SH212 suggesting that there is a property is displayed. The second fanning effect image 020SH212 is an image developed from the first fanning effect image 020SH211 and is, for example, an image in which the character operates (an image in which the character swings a sword).

11-10 and 11-11 (E) show a hold change suggestion effect, specifically, a screen during a small hit game in the chance time mode (action effect: step 3). Specifically, the action effect image 020SH213 is displayed on the image display device 5. The action effect image 020SH213 is an image obtained by developing the second fanning effect image 020SH212, for example, an image in which a character acts on the hold display 020SH206 (the sword touches the hold display 020SH206).

FIG. 11-10 (F) shows a change in the hold display (step 4) in the chance time mode. Specifically, in the image display device 5, the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 changes from the display mode of high expectation (for example, from "ash") at the timing of the hold shift 020SH214 when the variable display of the decorative symbol 020SH200 is started. (Changed to "blue") is displayed. That is, as shown in (E), the action effect image 020SH 213 acts on the hold display 020SH 206 in the small hit game state, so that the display mode of the hold display 020SH 206 changes in (F) of FIG. 11-10. The change production of is performed. In FIG. 11-10, the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 is changed when the next variable display is started after the small hit game is completed, but the display mode is not limited to this, for example, the small hit. During the game (before the start of the next variable display), the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 may be changed.

On the other hand, FIG. 11-11 (F) shows a Gase effect (Gase hold change suggestion effect) in which the display mode of the hold display in the chance time mode does not change. Specifically, it shows a case where the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 does not change to the display mode of high expectation even at the timing of the hold shift 020SH214 when the variable display of the decorative symbol 020SH200 is started. That is, although the action effect image 020SH213 (image showing the bow and arrow) acted on the hold display 020SH206 in the small hit game state as shown in (E), the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 in (F) of FIG. 11-11. Will not change (the production will not develop).

As shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11, when it is determined that the small hit game is executed in the small hit determination in the chance time mode, the feature unit 020SH has the decorative symbol 020SH200 and the small hit notification image 020SH202. Are all stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a combination of losses, and it is possible to execute a hold change suggestion effect (display of the action effect image 020SH213) that suggests a content advantageous to the player during the small hit game. In addition, it is possible to expect a change in the display mode of the hold display by the hold change suggestion effect or the Gase hold change suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11, and the small hit game state in the chance time mode can be expected. The controlled period can be effectively utilized. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

In addition, in FIG. 11-11 (C), although the first fanning effect image 020SH211 is displayed, the second fanning effect image 020SH212 shown in (D) and the action effect image 020SH213 shown in (E) are not displayed. May be done. Further, in (D), there is a case where the second fanning effect image 020SH212 is displayed, but the action effect image 020SH213 is not displayed. Further, in (E), there is a case where the action effect image 020SH213 does not act on the hold display 020SH206 (for example, an effect of displaying an image in which the character flies at the upper left of the image display device 5).

Further, for each image (or at least one image) of the first fanning effect image 020SH211, the second fanning effect image 020SH212, and the action effect image 020SH213, a plurality of display modes are prepared, and these are prepared. The ease of changing the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 may differ depending on the display mode of. Specifically, for each image, prepare a display mode that is easy to determine when the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 changes, and a display mode that is easy to determine when the display mode of the hold display 020SH206 does not change. Just do it. Further, the display mode of the hold display 020SH 206 may be changed without displaying the action effect image 020SH213, that is, without performing the hold change suggestion effect.

(An example of the transition of the setting value suggestion effect in the chance time mode)
FIG. 11-12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a set value suggestion effect in the chance time mode. Since (A) to (D) in FIGS. 11-12 are the same as (A) to (D) in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-10, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 11-12 (E) shows a screen (set value suggestion effect) during a small hit game in the chance time mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a set value suggestion image 020SH 220 whose background image indicates night. The background image at night in the set value suggestion image 020SH220 is an image suggesting that the set value is 4 or more (see (B) in FIG. 11-7).

FIG. 11-12 (F) shows that the small hit game is completed and the next variable display is performed. In the set value suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 11-12, the set value suggestion image 020SH220 is displayed within the period controlled by the small hit gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the following Even after the start of the variable display, the set value suggestion image 020SH220 may be continuously displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-12, in the feature unit 020SH, when it is determined that the small hit game is executed in the small hit determination in the chance time mode, both the decorative symbol 020SH200 and the small hit notification image 020SH202 are lost. It is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the combination, and the set value suggestion image 020SH220 is displayed during the small hit game. That is, in the feature unit 020SH, when controlled to the small hit gaming state in the high probability / first KT state or the low probability / first KT state, the setting value suggestion effect suggesting the content advantageous to the player (setting value suggestion). Image 020SH220 display) can be executed. By the set value suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 11-12, the period controlled by the small hit game state in the chance time mode can be effectively utilized, and the interest can be improved.

In addition, in the set value suggestion effect, there is a case where the disappointment effect is performed in the same manner as the hold change suggestion effect. Specifically, in FIG. 11-12 (C), there is a case where the first fanning effect image 020SH211 is displayed, but the second fanning effect image 020SH212 shown in (D) is not displayed. Further, in (D), there is a case where the second fanning effect image 020SH212 is displayed, but the set value suggestion image 020SH220 is not displayed.

Further, for each image (or at least one image) of the first fanning effect image 020SH211, the second fanning effect image 020SH212, and the action effect image 020SH213, a plurality of display modes are prepared, and these are prepared. The ease with which the set value suggestion effect is executed may differ depending on the display mode of. Specifically, for each image, a display mode that is easy to determine when the set value suggestion effect is executed and a display mode that is easy to determine when the set value suggestion effect is not executed may be prepared.

(An example of the transition of the probability change suggestion effect in the chance time mode)
FIG. 11-13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a probability change suggestion effect in the chance time mode. Since (A) to (D) in FIGS. 11-13 are the same as (A) to (D) in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-10, the description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 11-13 (E) shows a screen (probability change suggestion effect) during a small hit game in the chance time mode. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a probability change suggestion image 020SH230 in which three characters appear. The probability change suggestion image 020SH230 in which three characters appear is an image showing that there is a high possibility that the state is controlled to a high probability state (see (C) in FIG. 11-7).

FIG. 11-13 (F) shows that the small hit game is completed and the next variable display is performed. In the probability variation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 11-13, the probability variation suggestion image 020SH230 is displayed within the period controlled by the small hit gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the following variable display is performed. The probability change suggestion image 020SH230 may be continuously displayed even after the start of.

As shown in FIG. 11-13, in the feature unit 020SH, when it is determined that the small hit game is executed in the small hit determination in the chance time mode, both the decorative symbol 020SH200 and the small hit notification image 020SH202 are lost. It is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the combination, and the probability change suggestion image 020SH230 is displayed during the small hit game. That is, in the feature unit 020SH, when controlled to the small hit gaming state in the high probability / first KT state or the low probability / first KT state, the probabilistic incitement effect suggesting the content advantageous to the player (probability variation suggestion image 020SH230). Display) can be executed. By the probability change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 11-13, the period controlled by the small hit game state in the chance time mode can be effectively utilized, and the interest can be improved.

In addition, in the probabilistic change suggestion effect, there is a case where the disappointment effect is performed in the same manner as the hold change suggestion effect. Specifically, in FIG. 11-13 (C), there is a case where the first fanning effect image 020SH211 is displayed, but the second fanning effect image 020SH212 shown in (D) is not displayed. Further, in (D), there is a case where the second fanning effect image 020SH212 is displayed, but the probability change suggestion image 020SH230 is not displayed.

Further, for each image (or at least one image) of the first fanning effect image 020SH211, the second fanning effect image 020SH212, and the action effect image 020SH213, a plurality of display modes are prepared, and these are prepared. The ease with which the probabilistic incitement effect is executed may differ depending on the display mode of. Specifically, for each image, a display mode that is easily determined when the probability variation suggestion effect is executed and a display mode that is easily determined when the probability variation suggestion effect is not executed may be prepared.

Each suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 to 11-13 can improve the interest in the small hit game state in the chance time mode. Specifically, in the chance time mode in which the variable display of 1.5 seconds is continuously executed, the small hit game is executed even if the small hit game exceeding 1.8 seconds is executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize this, and it is possible to make it appear that the game is proceeding smoothly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable that the game may have stopped during the small hit game in the first KT state, and in the first KT state, a light game (with a good tempo). , A pleasant game) can be realized.

(About the small hit opening timing and the execution timing of various suggestion effects)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 11-14, the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17 in the small hit game and the execution timing of various suggestion effects will be described. FIG. 11-14 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the small hit opening timing and the execution timing of various suggestion effects. FIG. 11-14 shows a variable display of a special symbol (second special symbol) determined to be a small hit in the small hit determination, and a small hit game (opening of the special variable winning ball device 17) executed thereafter. ..

First, the variable display of the special symbol and the small hit game will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-14, in the first KT state, the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. The variable display time (variation time) of the second special symbol in the first KT state is 1 second if the second reserved storage number is "1 or more" (second variation pattern # 11 in FIG. 10-8 or FIG. 10). (Refer to the second fluctuation pattern # 26 of FIG. 9), and if the second reserved storage number is “0”, it is 5 seconds (the second fluctuation pattern # 10 of FIG. 10-8 or the second of FIG. 10-9). Fluctuation pattern # 25). When the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, the second special symbol (for example, a small hit symbol) is confirmed and displayed until the symbol confirmation period (also referred to as a symbol confirmation period) of 0.5 seconds elapses.

Then, when the symbol determination period elapses, it is controlled to the small hit game state. The small hit game state includes a fanfare period of 0.1 seconds, a predetermined opening period, and a small hit ending period. Specifically, in the small hit game state, after the small hit fanfare period of 0.1 seconds has elapsed, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened, and when a predetermined opening period (for example, 1.8 seconds) elapses, a special The variable winning ball device 17 closes and shifts to the small hit ending period. When the small hit ending period has elapsed, the next variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Next, the execution timing of the hold change suggestion effect (including the Gase hold change suggestion effect) will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-14, when the small hit fanfare period has elapsed and the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17 is reached, the first fanfare effect (display of the first fanfare effect image 020SH211 in FIG. 11-10) and the second A fanfare effect (display of the second fanfare effect image 020SH212) and an action effect (display of an image in which the action effect image 020SH213 is in contact with the hold display 020SH206) are performed. Then, when the hold display is changed (in the case of the hold change suggestion effect), the hold display changes at the timing when the next variable display of the second special symbol is executed (the timing of the hold shift). On the other hand, in the case of the Gase hold change suggestion effect, the hold display does not change at the timing (timing of the hold shift) when the next variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and the display mode of the current hold display is maintained.

As described above, in the feature unit 020SH, the small hit game, the variable display, and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display are performed. This makes it difficult for the player to determine the transition from the small hit game state to the state in which the variable display is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear that the game is proceeding smoothly, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game.

Next, the set value suggestion effect and the probability change suggestion effect will be described. In the description of FIGS. 11-14, the set value suggestion effect and the probability change suggestion effect are referred to as “set value suggestion effect, etc.”. As shown in FIGS. 11-14, when the small hit fanfare period has elapsed and the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17 is reached, the first fanfare effect (for example, the display of the first fanfare effect image 020SH211 in FIG. 11-12). The second fanfare effect (display of the second fanfare effect image 020SH212), the set value suggestion effect, and the like (display of the set value suggestion image 020SH220, etc.) are performed. The set value suggestion effect and the like are executed until, for example, the closing timing of the special variable winning ball device 17.

As described above, in the feature unit 020SH, the set value suggestion effect and the like are performed corresponding to the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17. Therefore, it is difficult to pay attention to the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17, and it is possible to pay attention to the setting value suggestion effect and the like. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the small hit game in which the game ball hardly wins, and it is possible to make it appear that the game is proceeding smoothly. In addition, the period controlled by the small hit game state can be effectively utilized by the set value suggestion effect or the like, and the interest during the small hit game can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 020SH, each suggestion effect is started at the timing of the opening start of the special variable winning ball device 17. Therefore, since each suggestion effect can be started immediately after the transition to the small hit game state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the small hit game is being executed, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the small hit game is being executed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The timing at which each suggestion effect is executed may be any timing according to the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17, specifically, the timing including the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17. good. For example, the start timing of each suggestion effect is not limited to the timing of the opening start of the special variable winning ball device 17, and may be the timing during the small hit fanfare period. As a result, these effects can be started at the earliest timing after the transition to the small hit game state, so that it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to recognize that the small hit game is being executed.

Further, the start timing of each suggestion effect may be the timing during the symbol fixing period or the timing during the variable display of the second special symbol. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to discriminate the transition from the state in which the variable display is executed to the small hit game state. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear that the game is proceeding smoothly, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game.

Further, the end timing of the set value suggestion effect and the like is not limited to the closing timing of the special variable winning ball device 17, and may be the timing during the small hit ending period. As a result, these effects can be executed until the end of the small hit game state, so that the period controlled by the small hit game state can be more effectively utilized.

Further, the end timing of each suggestion effect may be the timing during the variable display of the next second special symbol. This makes it difficult for the player to discriminate the transition from the small hit game state to the state in which the variable display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear that the game is proceeding smoothly, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game.

As described above, in the above-described embodiment, the interest of the game can be improved. Here, I would like to make a concrete supplement on the improvement of interest. In the first KT state, for example, a shortening fluctuation (1 second fluctuation) and a small hit game (decorative symbol is stopped at a lost symbol) are repeatedly executed. If no special effect is performed in the small hit game state, it seems as if the progress of the game is stopped in the small hit game state. Therefore, it does not appear that the game progresses quickly and lightly in the first KT state (high base state), and the player may feel a sense of discomfort. In addition, the time controlled to the small hit gaming state in the first KT state may be wasted time for the player.

As described above, in the embodiment according to the feature unit 020SH, when the small hit gaming state is controlled in the first KT state (high probability / first KT state or low probability / first KT state), it is advantageous for the player. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting the content (for example, one of a hold change suggestion effect, a set value suggestion effect, and a probability change suggestion effect). Therefore, even if the small hit game is repeatedly executed in the first KT state in which the game ball hardly wins, the player can be given the impression that the game is proceeding smoothly, that is, the small hit game in the first KT state. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game. Further, since the period in which the small hit game is executed in the first KT state can be effectively utilized, it is possible to suppress that the period is wasted time for the player.

Further, when the small hit gaming state is controlled in the second KT state, an effect corresponding to the control of the small hit gaming state (for example, display of the small hit notification image 020SH202 and the winning effect image 020SH203 shown in FIGS. 11-9) is displayed. Made feasible. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the first KT state and the second KT state.

(Modification example 1 of feature portion 020SH)
Next, a modification 1 of the feature portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment relating to the feature unit 020SH, a configuration in which the feature unit 020SH is applied to the so-called one-type pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described. Instead of such a configuration, it is also possible to apply the feature unit 020SH to a so-called one-kind two-kind mixed type pachinko gaming machine. An example of one specification of a pachinko gaming machine of a mixed type of one type and two types will be described below.

In a pachinko gaming machine of one type and two types mixed type, in a normal state (non-special state: low base state), a variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol game) is mainly executed by left-handing. When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, the jackpot game is executed.

In the determination based on the winning of the first starting winning opening, the small hit probability is constant regardless of the set value, and is, for example, 6298/65536 (about 1/100). Although the details will be described later, even if the small hit game is executed based on the winning of the first starting winning opening, the game ball passes through the specific area (V area) in the special variable winning ball device 17. Things can hardly be expected.

Further, in the determination based on the winning of the first starting winning opening, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value. Here, an example of the jackpot probability for each set value based on the winning of the first starting winning opening is shown below.

When the set value is "1", it is 329/65536 (about 1/199).
When the set value is "2", it is 346/65536 (about 1/189).
When the set value is "3", it is 366/65536 (about 1/179).
When the set value is "4", it is 387/65536 (about 1/169).
When the set value is "5", it is 412/65536 (about 1/159).
When the set value is "6", it is 439/65536 (about 1/149).

Since the small hit probability is constant in the judgment based on the winning of the first starting winning opening, the set values "1" to "6" are set by making the loss probability different according to the set values "1" to "6". The jackpot probability according to "6" can be set.

For example, in the first special figure game, when it is determined to execute the jackpot game, the game shifts to a special state (for example, a time saving state) after the jackpot game is executed according to the jackpot type (with a predetermined probability). .. When the big hit game is executed, depending on the big hit type, it may return to the normal state, for example, without shifting to the special state.

In the special state, for example, the game (mainly the second special figure game) is performed by right-handed striking aiming at the gate arranged on the right side of the game area and the second start winning opening. The special state is a high base state, and specifically, the following controls (1) to (4) are performed.
(1) Control is performed to make the probability of hitting a normal figure higher than in the normal state.
(2) Control is performed to make the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory longer than the normal state.
(3) Control is performed to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal figure game from the normal state.
(4) Control is performed to shorten the fluctuation time of the special symbol from the normal state.
This makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening, and the frequency with which the second special figure game is executed increases. The special state is controlled, for example, until a predetermined number of variable displays are executed.

On the other hand, in the normal state, the above controls (1) to (4) are not performed. Even if the player hits right in the normal state, the probability of hitting the normal figure is low, the opening time of the normal electric accessory is short, and the fluctuation time of the normal figure game is long, so the second start winning opening You can hardly expect to win a prize.

Further, in the determination based on the winning of the second starting winning opening, the small hit probability is constant regardless of the set value, and is, for example, 62896/65536 (about 96/100). It should be noted that the small hit probability in the determination based on the winning of the second starting winning opening and the small hit probability in the determination based on the winning of the first starting winning opening are different.

Further, in the determination based on the winning of the second starting winning opening, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value. Here, an example of the jackpot probability for each set value based on the winning of the second starting winning opening is shown below.

When the set value is "1", it is 329/65536 (about 1/199).
When the set value is "2", it is 346/65536 (about 1/189).
When the set value is "3", it is 366/65536 (about 1/179).
When the set value is "4", it is 387/65536 (about 1/169).
When the set value is "5", it is 412/65536 (about 1/159).
When the set value is "6", it is 439/65536 (about 1/149).

Since the small hit probability is constant in the judgment based on the winning of the second start winning opening, the set values "1" to "6" are set by making the loss probability different according to the set values "1" to "6". The jackpot probability according to "6" can be set.

As described above, since the small hit probability is 96/100 in the judgment based on the winning of the second starting winning opening, the small hit symbol is derived in the variable display in the special state (mainly the second special figure game). Easy to display. In the small hit game state, the special variable winning ball device 17 arranged on the right side of the game area is opened, the game ball wins in the special variable winning ball device 17 (small hit attacker), and the special variable winning ball device 17 is used. When passing through the provided specific area (so-called V area), the big hit game is executed. In the small hit game state in the special state, since the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is longer than in the normal state, it is easy to win a prize in the special variable winning ball device 17, and it is easy to pass through the V region. It has become.

In the special state (mainly the second special figure game), when the game ball passes through the V area under the control of the small hit game state until the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed, the special state is terminated. A jackpot game is executed. Further, in the special state, even if it is determined that the jackpot game is to be executed before the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed (even when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed), the special state is similarly terminated. , The jackpot game is executed. Then, when the big hit game is executed, it is controlled to the special state again according to the big hit type (with a predetermined probability). In this way, by executing the jackpot game in a special state (by the consecutive villas), the player can expect many prize balls.

On the other hand, in the special state, even if the jackpot game is executed before the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed, depending on the jackpot type, the game shifts to the normal state without being controlled by the special state. In some cases. Further, in the special state, even when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, the normal state is entered. Specifically, in the special state, if the big hit game is not executed until the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed (for example, although the game is controlled to the small hit game state, the game ball wins a special variable prize. If the ball device 17 does not win a prize, does not pass through the V region, or the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed), the normal state is entered. As a result, the control of the special state ends, and the consecutive villa ends. Even in a one-type and two-type mixed type pachinko gaming machine, for example, a variable display of a special symbol is not performed in the big hit game state and the small hit game state.

In such a one-kind and two-kind mixed type pachinko gaming machine, when the small hit gaming state is controlled in a special state, a special effect corresponding to the control of the small hit gaming state (special state) (for example, "small hit attacker") (Display the image of "Aim for the special variable winning ball device 17)!") Can be executed. Thereby, in the small hit game in the special state, the player can expect a big hit.

Further, in the variable display of the first special figure game in the normal state (non-special state: low base state), the small hit symbol may be derived and displayed (small hit probability: about 1/100). In the small hit game in the normal state, the game is performed by hitting left, and since the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged in the right side area, it is difficult to win a prize in the special variable winning ball device 17. .. Even if you hit right, it is difficult to win in the special variable winning ball device 17 because the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is short, and even if you win in the special variable winning ball device 17, V Since it is difficult to pass through the region, it can hardly be expected that the game ball will pass through the V region.

In the first modification, in such a one-kind and two-kind mixed type pachinko gaming machine, when the pachinko machine is controlled to the small hit gaming state (special state) in the normal state (non-special state), the suggestion effect related to the feature unit 020SH is produced. It may be feasible. The suggestion effect is an effect that suggests content that is advantageous to the player, for example, a suggestion effect based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination, a set value suggestion effect, and the like. The suggestion effect based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination is, for example, a hold change suggestion effect, but is not limited to this, and is an effect suggesting that the hold storage information having a high expectation of a big hit is stored (for example,). It may be a display of a background image, a character image, or the like with high expectations).

Even in the special state, when the first hold storage is stored, the small hit symbol may be derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special figure game. In this case, when the small hit game is configured to be difficult to pass through the V region, the suggestion effect related to the feature unit 020SH may be executed when controlled by the small hit game.

According to the first modification, even if the small hit game in the normal state in which the game ball hardly wins is executed, the player can be given the impression that the game is proceeding smoothly, that is, the small in the normal state. The hit game can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game. Therefore, according to the first modification, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the normal state in the one-type and two-type mixed type pachinko gaming machine. The type / two mixed type pachinko gaming machine is not limited to the above-mentioned specifications, and may have other specifications as long as the small hit game in a normal state in which the gaming ball hardly wins is executed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the feature unit 020SH can be expressed as follows. A gaming machine capable of playing a game (a kind and two mixed type pachinko gaming machine), in which a gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state and identification information (for example, a special symbol) are variably displayed and displayed. The game state control means includes a variable display execution means for deriving and displaying the result, and an effect execution means, and the gaming state control means has an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player and a special state different from the advantageous state. (For example, a small hit gaming state), a non-special state (for example, a normal state), and a special state that is more easily controlled by the special state than the non-special state (special state according to the modification 1 of the feature unit 020SH: for example. , Time saving state), the advantageous state and the special state are states in which the variable display is not performed, and the effect executing means is controlled to the special state in the special state. , A special effect corresponding to the control of the special state (for example, displaying an image of "Aim for a small hit attacker (special variable winning ball device 17)!") Can be executed, and the special state is set in the non-special state. When controlled, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect based on a pre-reading determination result, a set value suggestion effect, etc.) that is different from the special effect and suggests content that is advantageous to the player. be.

(Variation example 2 of the feature portion 020SH)
Next, a modification 2 of the feature portion 020SH will be described. In the embodiment related to the feature unit 020SH described above, the configuration in which the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened once at the time of a small hit has been described. In the second modification, instead of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, the special variable winning ball device 17 may be opened a plurality of times according to the small hit type.

Specifically, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 17 is 1.8 seconds × 1 time in the case of the small hit C having the longest opening time (see FIG. 10-14), but the opening pattern is not limited to this. The opening pattern may be, for example, when the opening time is the longest, the total opening time may be 1.8 seconds or less, and may be 0.9 seconds × 2 times or 0.2 seconds × 9 times. In addition, it may be possible to execute a suggestion effect of the content according to the opening pattern. Specifically, for example, a suggestion effect corresponding to opening 0.9 seconds × 2 times may be executed. In this way, even if the opening pattern is opened a plurality of times, it is possible to make it difficult to pay attention to the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17 and to pay attention to each suggestion effect by performing the suggestion effect according to the opening pattern. ..

(Variation example 3 of the feature portion 020SH)
Next, a modification 3 of the feature portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 020SH, the configuration in which the suggestion effect can be executed in the first KT state has been described. In the third modification, the suggestion effect may be executed in the normal state (low probability / low base state) in place of or in addition to such a configuration.

For example, in the normal state (low probability / low base state), the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed by winning the first start winning opening, but the small hit probability in the small hit determination in this case is As shown in FIG. 10-3, it is "6298/65536" (about 10%). The type of small hit by winning the first start winning opening is small hit A (opening time: 0.2 seconds). In addition, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit (small hit A) is executed, the non-reach lost symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed so that the player does not have excessive expectations. I have to.

Therefore, in the modification 3, the suggestion effect may be executed when the small hit game state is controlled in the normal state. In addition, in order to secure the time to execute the suggestion effect, the small hit fanfare period and the small hit ending period may be set long. As a result, the effect in the small hit game in the normal state can be made useful for the player. Therefore, the period controlled by the small hit game in the normal state can be effectively utilized, and the interest of the small hit game in the normal state can be improved.

After shifting from the low probability / high base state to the normal state, the variable display based on the second hold storage may be executed. Specifically, immediately after the transition from the low probability / high base state to the normal state, variable display based on the second reserved storage stored in the low probability / high base state before the transition may be executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed at the same time, the small hit symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display based on the second hold storage in the normal state. Then, when the small hit game is executed, the variable display of the first special symbol may be executed. In this case, the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the period controlled by the small hit game state, and the variable display of the first special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol is extended for the period controlled by the small hit game state. In the modified example 3, it is also possible to perform a suggestion effect during the period when the variable display of the first special symbol is extended. That is, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect in the normal state (low probability / low base state). As a result, the period during which the variable display of the first special symbol is extended can be effectively utilized, and the interest can be improved.

(Variation example 4 of the feature portion 020SH)
Next, a modification 4 of the feature portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 020SH, a configuration for executing a pending change suggestion effect suggesting a jackpot expectation degree has been described as a suggestion effect based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination. In the modified example 4, instead of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, as a suggestion effect based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination, a suggestion effect suggesting the jackpot type when the pre-reading determination is made as a jackpot. May be feasible.

For example, when the hold memory determined to be a 2R normal big hit is stored during the small hit game in the high probability / first KT state, that is, from the high probability / first KT state to the low probability / first KT state. If it is known that the transition is made, it may be possible to perform an unfortunate effect (unfortunate effect) for the player during the small hit game. Specifically, for example, in a small hit game before the variable display based on the hold memory determined to be a 2R normal big hit is started, the background image is darkened, or the background image is a skull and crossbones image. You may perform an effect such as displaying an effect image. Further, in this case, for example, the hold change suggestion effect may be performed to change the hold display to the hold display with a skull and crossbones image for the target hold memory.

On the other hand, when the hold memory determined to be a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot is stored during the small hit game in the high probability / 1st KT state or the low probability / 1st KT state, that is, the high probability / When it is known that the state shifts from the first KT state or the low probability / first KT state to the second KT state, it may be possible to execute a production (high expectation degree production) that is pleasing to the player during the small hit game. Specifically, for example, in a small hit game before the variable display based on the hold memory determined to be a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot is started, the background image may be displayed brightly (rainbow-colored). , An effect such as displaying an image of an angel mark or an effect image on the background image may be performed. Further, in this case, for example, a hold change suggestion effect may be performed on the hold memory of the target to change the hold display to a hold display with an image of an angel mark.

In addition, if a plurality of small hit games are executed before the variable display corresponding to the hold storage of the target for which the look-ahead is determined is executed, the same suggestion effect is produced in the multiple small hit games (unfortunately). The effect or high expectation effect) may be performed, that is, the suggestion effect may be performed a plurality of times. Further, when the variable display corresponding to the target hold storage is executed a plurality of times, the same suggestion is made not only in the small hit game state but also in the multiple variable displays. You may perform the production. That is, such a suggestion effect may be continuously executed until the variable display based on the hold storage of the pre-reading determination target is started.

(Variation example 5 of the feature portion 020SH)
Next, a modification 5 of the feature portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment according to the feature unit 020SH, the ratio for determining that the display mode of the hold display is changed during the variable display in FIG. 11-8 (“change determination ratio during variable display” in the description of the modified example 5”. ) Was explained as the same ratio as the determination ratio (decision ratio of the hold change suggestion effect) in which the hold display is changed with the hold change suggestion effect during the small hit game. In the modified example 5, the change determination ratio during the variable display and the determination ratio of the pending change suggestion effect may be different ratios.

For example, the decision rate of the pending change suggestion effect may be higher than the change decision rate during the variable display. As a result, it is easier to change the hold display accompanied by the hold change suggestion effect than the change of the hold display during the variable display, and the period controlled by the small hit game state can be effectively utilized.

Further, the change determination ratio during the variable display and the determination ratio of the hold change suggestion effect may be different depending on the pre-reading determination (determination of big hit) result for the hold storage information of the target. For example, when it is determined by the look-ahead determination that a big hit is to be executed, the decision rate of the hold change suggestion effect is set to be higher than the change determination rate during the variable display, while the look-ahead determination determines that the jackpot is lost. In this case, the decision rate of the pending change suggestion effect may be lower than the change decision rate during the variable display. As a result, the change in the hold display accompanied by the hold change suggestion effect can be made to have a higher degree of expectation than the change in the display mode of the hold display during the variable display. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the pending change suggestion effect during the small hit game.

In the first KT state (high probability / first KT state or low probability / first KT state), the hold display may be changed more easily than in other gaming states (normal state or second KT state). That is, the chance time mode may be set as the mode in which the display mode of the hold display is most likely to change. Further, in this case, the determination ratio of the pending change suggestion effect may be higher than the change determination ratio during the variable display. That is, among the effects of changing the display mode of the hold display, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display may be most easily executed with the hold change suggestion effect during the small hit game. As a result, it is possible to effectively utilize the period controlled by the small hit game state in the chance time mode.

(Variation example 6 of the feature portion 020SH)
Next, a modification 6 of the feature portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment according to the feature unit 020SH, the Gase hold change suggestion effect during the small hit game is executed when the final color of the hold memory during the hold display is all gray (FIG. 11-6). 020SHS70: See YES). In the modified example 6, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the Gase hold change suggestion effect during the small hit game is displayed in the hold memory during the hold display, and the final color is a special display other than gray. It may be feasible even when the reserved storage determined as the mode is stored.

In this case, the hold storage determined to have a gray final color may be easier to perform the Gase hold change suggestion effect than the hold storage determined to be the special display mode. As a result, even when the reserved storage determined to be the special display mode is stored, it is possible to perform the Gase holding change suggestion effect for the reserved storage determined to be the display mode whose final color is gray. You can liven up the production during the hit game.

On the contrary, for the hold storage determined to be the special display mode, it may be easier to perform the Gase hold change suggestion effect than the hold memory determined to have the final color gray display mode. For example, the hold change suggestion effect may be forcibly executed for the hold memory whose final color is determined to be the special display mode, and the hold change suggestion effect may not be executed. In this case, in the active display, the display mode is changed to the final color. As a result, it is possible to intentionally lower the expectation of the player at the stage of the hold display, and to increase the expectation when the display mode changes at the stage of the active display. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the pending change suggestion production.

(Variation example 7 of the feature portion 020SH)
Next, a modification 7 of the feature portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 020SH, a configuration for performing a hold change suggestion effect, a set value suggestion effect, and a probability change suggestion effect has been described. In the modification 7, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, an explanatory suggestion effect regarding the progress of the game may be made feasible as a suggestion effect.

The explanation suggestion effect is, for example, an effect using a character image relating to the progress of the game in the chance time mode, and specifically, an explanation suggestion effect such as "maybe the mode shifts to the normal mode in 50 games?" It suggests an explanation suggestion effect such as "It's about to reach RUSH mode!" And a possibility that it is controlled to a high probability state in the chance mode at the time of the first hit (62% = "56/56 + 35"%: see Fig. 11-1). Is the probability of probability change a little over 60%? "

Here, in the feature unit 020SH, the gaming state is controlled to any one of a plurality of gaming states such as a normal state, a high probability / first KT state, a low probability / first KT state, and a second KT state. In addition, since the game state changes, it may be difficult for the player to grasp the content of the game. Therefore, by making it possible to execute the explanatory suggestion effect of the modified example 7, the player can easily grasp the game state and the like that can be transferred after the chance mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Variation example 8 of the feature portion 020SH)
Next, a modification 8 of the feature portion 020SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment related to the feature unit 020SH, a configuration in which the feature unit 020SH is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is controlled to a high probability state until the next jackpot when the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot is executed will be described. bottom. Instead of such a configuration, it is also possible to apply the feature unit 020SH to a gaming machine (for example, a so-called ST machine) that is controlled to a high probability state until a predetermined number of times elapses. Here, a specification example of the pachinko gaming machine of the ST machine will be described.

For example, in the ST machine, when the probability variation jackpot is executed, it is controlled to a high probability state until the variable display of the specified number of times (ST number of times) is executed, and when the variable display of the specified number of times is executed, it is high. It shifts from the probability state to the low probability state.

Further, when the probabilistic jackpot is executed, it is controlled to a high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the probabilistic jackpot game. The period controlled to the high probability / first KT state (variable display number) is the period corresponding to the probability variation jackpot symbol (transition variation number). When the number of transition fluctuations is executed after being controlled to the high probability / first KT state, the transition from the high base state (high probability / first KT state) to the low base state (second KT state) is performed. The number of transition fluctuations is, for example, less than the number of STs.

As a result, it becomes possible to control in the second KT state from the time when the number of transition fluctuations elapses until the number of ST times elapses, that is, the small hit game in which a prize can be expected is executed. If the jackpot is not won even once before the variable display of the ST number is executed in the second KT state, the variable display of the ST number is executed to return to the normal state. Here, when the small hit gaming state is controlled in the second KT state, the effect corresponding to the control of the small hit gaming state (for example, the display of the small hit notification image 020SH202 and the winning effect image 020SH203 shown in FIGS. 11-9). Makes it feasible.

Further, in the ST machine, when the normal jackpot symbol is executed, it is controlled to a high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the normal jackpot game. The period controlled to the low probability / first KT state (variable display number) is usually a period corresponding to the jackpot symbol (transition fluctuation number). When the number of transition fluctuations is executed after being controlled to the low probability / first KT state, the transition from the high base state (low probability / first KT state) to the low base state (normal state) is performed.

In the high probability / first KT state and the low probability / first KT state, a common effect (for example, a Chantime mode) may be executed. In the first KT state, although small hits are likely to occur, it is difficult for the game ball to win the special variable winning ball device 17, that is, the winning ball cannot be expected.

In the modified example 8, when the small hit game state is controlled in the first KT state (high probability / first KT state or low probability / first KT state) in the ST machine, a suggestion effect suggesting an advantageous content for the player. (For example, any one of the pending change suggestion effect, the set value suggestion effect, and the probability change suggestion effect) may be enabled.

According to the modified example 8, even if the small hit game in the first KT state in which the game ball hardly wins is repeatedly executed in the ST machine, the impression that the game is proceeding smoothly is obtained by executing the suggestion effect. Can be given to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game due to the small hit game in the first KT state. In particular, in the pachinko gaming machine of the ST machine, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the first KT state. The pachinko gaming machine of the ST machine is not limited to the above-mentioned specifications, and may have other specifications as long as a small hit game in which the gaming ball hardly wins is executed.

(Explanation of means related to feature unit 020SH)
In relation to the above-mentioned feature portion 020SH, a pachinko gaming machine is known in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed at the same time, and small hits are frequently generated in a probabilistic gaming state (for example). , Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-033787.). However, when a small hit game in which the game ball hardly wins is executed, the variable display is not performed during this period, which may give the player the impression that the game is not progressing smoothly. be. Specifically, for example, if a small hit game in which the game ball hardly wins is repeatedly executed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed each time in the small hit game state, and the game progresses smoothly. There is a risk of giving the player an unsatisfactory impression. For this reason, the player may feel uncomfortable, and the interest of the game may be reduced.

Therefore, the gaming machine of the means 1 according to the feature unit 020SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game), and the gaming state control for controlling the gaming state. The means (for example, the portion of the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) for executing steps S120 to S128 shown in FIG. 6) and the identification information (for example, a special symbol) are variably displayed and displayed. A variable display executing means for deriving and displaying the result (for example, a portion for executing steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) shown in FIG. 4) and an effect executing means (for example, an effect). The gaming state control means includes a control CPU 120), and the gaming state control means has an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit gaming state) and a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state). It is possible to control a non-special state (first KT state) and a special state (for example, a second KT state) that is more easily controlled by the special state than the non-special state, and the advantageous state and the special state are variable. When the display is not performed and the effect executing means is controlled to the special state in the special state, the special effect corresponding to the control of the special state (for example, a small hit shown in FIG. 10-9). The broadcast image 020SH202, the small symbol 020SH201, and the winning effect image 020SH203) can be executed, and when controlled to the special state in the non-special state, the effect is different from the special effect and is advantageous for the player. (For example, the pending change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 11-11 (E)) can be executed.

According to such a configuration, even if the small hit game is repeatedly executed in the non-special state (for example, the first KT state), it is possible to give the player the impression that the game is proceeding smoothly, that is, that is, The small hit game in a non-special state can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game. In particular, according to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the non-special state by the suggestion effect.

Further, as the gaming machine of the means 2 according to the feature unit 020SH, in the gaming machine described in the means 1, the effect executing means corresponds to the variable display of the identification information, and the decorative identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) is used. Variable display is possible, and when controlled to the special state in the special state, a special display result (for example, a combination indicating a small hit game) as a display result of the decoration identification information "1, 3,5 ”) is displayed, and when the special state is controlled in the non-special state, the display result of the decoration identification information is a predetermined display result different from the special display result (combination of decorative symbols indicating loss). Is displayed.

According to such a configuration, in the non-special state, it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to win the special winning opening during the small hit game, so that the predetermined display result (for example, the lost symbol) is forcibly stopped and displayed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly expected.

Further, it is shown that the display result of the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state for the variable display which has not been started yet in the gaming machine according to the means 1 or 2 as the gaming machine of the means 3 according to the feature unit 020SH. The effect executing means includes the pre-start determination means for determining (for example, pre-reading determination) whether or not the display result is obtained, and the effect execution means provides the suggestion effect (for example, FIG. 11-10) to make a suggestion regarding the pre-start determination means. (Holding change suggestion effect shown in (E)) can be executed.

According to such a configuration, since the suggestion effect based on the determination result of the look-ahead determination can be performed, the expectation for the reserved memory can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the non-special state.

Further, as the gaming machine of the means 4 according to the feature unit 020SH, the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 3 is provided with a holding storage means for storing information related to the variable display as a holding storage information, and the effect executing means is provided. , The hold storage information stored in the hold storage means is displayed as a hold display (for example, hold display 020SH206 shown in FIG. 11-10 (A)), and an action acting on the hold display in the suggestion effect. The effect (for example, the action effect image 020SH213 shown in FIG. 11-10 (E)) can be executed, and when the display mode of the hold display changes and when the display mode of the hold display does not change, be.

According to such a configuration, since it is possible to perform a series of effects including an action effect and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display, it is possible to pay attention to the hold display and increase the expectation for the hold memory. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the non-special state.

Further, as the gaming machine of the means 5 according to the feature unit 020SH, the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 4 can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. The effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect (for example, the set value suggestion image 020SH220 shown in FIG. 11-12 (E)) that makes a suggestion regarding the setting means.

According to such a configuration, in the small hit game in the non-special state (for example, the first KT state), the player can guess the set value. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the non-special state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5, as the gaming machine of the means 6 according to the feature unit 020SH, the non-special state includes the first non-special state (for example, the non-probability changing state: low probability / There are a first non-special state (for example, a probabilistic state: high probability / first KT state), which is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first non-special state. A common effect (chance time mode) can be executed when the first non-special state is controlled and when the second non-special state is controlled, and the suggestion effect is the second. It is suggested that the control is performed in a non-special state (for example, the probability change suggestion image 020SH230 shown in (E) of FIG. 11-13).

According to such a configuration, the common effect is executed when controlled by either the high probability / first KT state or the low probability / first KT state, and the probability change suggestion effect is performed in the small hit game in the Chantime mode. Since it is feasible, it is possible to make the player guess whether or not the player is in the probabilistic state in the small hit game in the high probability / first KT state and the low probability / first KT state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the non-special state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6, as the gaming machine of the means 7 according to the feature unit 020SH, the effect executing means has a plurality of types of suggestive effects (for example, different modes) as the suggestive effects. The odd number setting suggestion, the even number setting suggestion, and the setting value 4 or more suggestion) shown in FIG. 11-7 (B) can be executed, and the player can determine which type of the suggestion effect is executed. The advantages of the suggested content are different.

According to such a configuration, by making it possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestion effects, it is possible to increase the variation of the suggestion effects, so that it is possible to prevent the suggestion effects from becoming monotonous. In addition, since the degree of advantage differs depending on the suggestion effect, the degree of attention of the player can be different depending on the suggestion effect to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest during the small hit game in the non-special state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7, as the gaming machine of the means 8 according to the feature unit 020SH, the variable display executing means is a variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol). And the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel, and the first state in which the gaming medium easily passes through the starting area (for example, the second starting winning opening). A variable first variable winning means (for example, the variable winning ball device 6B shown in FIG. 1) is provided in the second state in which the gaming medium is difficult to pass through the starting region, and the gaming state controlling means is the first. The variable winning means can be controlled to a predetermined state (for example, the first KT state) that easily changes to the first state, and the effect executing means controls the special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) in the predetermined state. The suggestion effect can be executed when it is done.

According to such a configuration, even if the small hit game in the first KT state in which the game ball hardly wins is repeatedly executed, it is possible to give the player the impression that the game is proceeding smoothly, that is, the first. The small hit game in the 1KT state can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game. In particular, according to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the first KT state.

Further, as the gaming machine of the means 9 according to the feature unit 020SH, in the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 8, a winning state in which the gaming ball is easy to win (open state) and a winning state in which the gaming ball is difficult to win. A second variable winning means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 17 shown in FIG. 1) that can be changed is provided in a difficult state (closed state), and the second variable winning means is easy to win in the special state. The effect execution means can change to a state, and the effect executing means executes the suggestion effect in response to the change of the second variable winning means to the winning easy state (for example, the opening timing of the special variable winning ball device 17). ..

With such a configuration, it is difficult to pay attention to the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17, and it is possible to pay attention to the suggestion effect. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the small hit game in which the game ball hardly wins, and it is possible to prevent the small hit game from deteriorating the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 9, as the gaming machine of the means 10 according to the feature unit 020SH, in the gaming state control means, the gaming medium is in a specific region (for example, special variable) in the special state. It is possible to control the advantageous state based on passing through a specific region (so-called V region) in the winning ball device 17.

According to such a configuration, even if a small hit game is executed in a normal state (non-special state) in which the pachinko game machine in which the feature unit 020SH is a kind and two types mixed type, the game ball hardly wins a prize, the game is smoothly played. It is possible to give the player the impression that the game is in progress, that is, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the progress of the game due to the small hit game in the normal state. In particular, it is possible to improve the interest during the small hit game in the normal state.

Further, in the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 10, as the gaming machine of the means 11 according to the feature unit 020SH, when the effect executing means is controlled to the special state in the special state, the gaming medium is used. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the special area (for example, the discharge area) (for example, the game ball is detected by the second count switch 24 provided in the special winning opening), the passage of the game medium corresponds to the passage of the special area. Whether a predetermined effect (for example, the winning effect image 020SH203 shown in FIG. 11-11 (C)) can be executed and the gaming medium has passed through the special region when controlled to the special state in the non-special state. Regardless of whether or not, the predetermined effect is not executed.

According to such a configuration, in the second KT state, the player can be encouraged to win a prize in the special variable winning opening, and the interest in the second KT state can be improved. On the other hand, in the small hit game in the first KT state, although the game ball may rarely win a prize in the special variable winning opening, in order to prevent the predetermined effect from being executed, the prize in the small hit in the first KT state is given. It is possible to prevent the player from expecting it.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Frame LED
10 ... General winning opening 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... LED control board 15 ... Relay board 17 ... Special variable winning ball device 20 ... Ordinary symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start Mouth switch 23 ... 1st count switch 24 ... 2nd count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 41 ... Passing gate 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can play games,
A game state control means for controlling the game state, and
A variable display execution means that performs variable display of identification information and derives and displays the display result,
Production execution means and
Equipped with
The game state control means controls an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, a special state that is different from the advantageous state, a non-special state, and a special state that is more likely to be controlled by the special state than the non-special state. It is possible and
The advantageous state and the special state are states in which variable display of identification information is not performed.
The special state and the non-special state are states in which the game medium is launched toward a predetermined path among the movable paths of the game medium, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute variable display of the identification information for production according to the variable display of the identification information.
When the variable display of the identification information ends, the identification information for production can be stopped and displayed for a predetermined period.
When controlled to the special state, the production identification information stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display of the immediately preceding identification information is continuously stopped and displayed.
In the special state and the non-special state, it is possible to execute the promotion notification that promotes the launch of the game medium toward the predetermined path.
When the promotion notification is executed in the special state and the special state is controlled, it is possible to execute a special effect corresponding to the control of the special state.
When the promotion notification is executed in the non-special state and controlled to the special state, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that is different from the special effect and suggests a content advantageous to the player. can be,
As the suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying the expectation degree controlled in the advantageous state with respect to the variable display of the effect identification information after the introduction effect is executed.
When the suggestion effect is executed, the introduction effect is executed when the special state is controlled, and the notification effect is executed when the variable display of the effect identification information is started after the end of the special state. Is feasible,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images